Portable Quad-Band Mobile Phone

P O R T A B L E Q U A D - B A N D
M O B I L E P H O N E
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to
the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone System”), is proprietary to
Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited
to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation
and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you
agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or
otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All
applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC

Headquarters: Customer Care Center:
1301 E. Lookout Drive 1000 Klein Rd.
Richardson, TX 75082 Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address: http://www.samsung.com
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics America, Inc. and its related
entities.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
T839_UG_UVKCJ_PS_033111_F9
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its
affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
ACCESS® and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube
are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open
source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience
Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,
intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.
How Does It Work?
Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:
• Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.
• Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice, without
disturbing background noise.
• Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to overcome
surrounding noise.
The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed voice
clarity with every call.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability,
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ..............................................6 Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Customizing the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Section 3: Memory Card .............................................. 50
Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Using the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SD card Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List ............... 53
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Locking and Unlocking the Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Signing into Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Prefix Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Pause Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone .........................20 Wait Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Back View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 In Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Phone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Call Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Section 5: Entering Text ............................................... 69
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1
Using the Samsung Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configuring Samsung Keypad Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Group Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Section 6: Contacts ...................................................... 82 Cloud Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Using Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Contact List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contact Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Section 8: Multimedia ................................................ 116
Contact Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Camera and Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Sending a Namecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Copying Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 The Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Get Friends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Using the Media Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Additional Contact Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
The History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
The Updates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Section 7: Messages .................................................. 100 T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Creating and Sending Messages via Universal Composer . . . 100 Section 9: Applications and Development ................ 133
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Accounts and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Alarm & Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2
AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Mini Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
AppPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 My Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 My Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Call logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cloud Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 T-Mobile Mall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
DriveSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Facebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 TeleNav GPS Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Theme Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 ThinkFree Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Google Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Tips & Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Group Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Twitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Universal Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Qik Video Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Downloading a New Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Launching an Installed Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Section 10: Connections ............................................ 161
Media Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3
Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 LED settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Language & Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mobile AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Voice Input and Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Section 11: Time Management .................................. 177 Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Alarm and Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Section 13: Health and Safety Information ............... 215
Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Setting a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . . 219
Section 12: Changing Your Settings .......................... 181 Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Wireless and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Drive Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Location and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Screen Unlock Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for
Theme settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Jump key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . . . . . . 233
Accounts and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Privacy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
SD Card & Phone Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Notification Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4
Section 14: Warranty Information ............................. 236
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Index ............................................................................ 244
5
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to get started with your phone by

Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary
installing and charging the battery, installing the SIM card and from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone,
optional memory card, and setting up your voice mail. and any changes to the phone’s Settings.
Before using your phone for the first time, you’ll need to install Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the
and charge the battery and install the SIM card. The SIM card is phone unlocked, at the Home screen.
loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may
optional services, and many other features. If desired, you can vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any
changes to the phone’s Settings.
also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone.
Understanding this User Manual Special Text
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the
phone. A robust index for features begins on page 244. rest. These are intended to point out important information, share
Also included is important safety information that you should quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.
know before using your phone. This information is available near The definitions for these methods are as follows:
the back of the guide, beginning on page 215. • Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or
sub-menu.
This manual provides navigation instructions according to the
• Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation
may be different. • Important: Points out important information about the current feature
that could affect performance.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual
• Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent
assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the
loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.
available keys.
Getting Started 6
Text Conventions To remove the battery cover:
This manual provides condensed information about how to use 1. Locate the cover release latch and place your fingernail in
your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions the opening and firmly “pop” the cover off the device
are used to represent often-used steps: (similar to a soda can).
2. Remove the cover.
➔ Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in longer, or
repetitive, procedures.
Example: From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.”
Battery Cover
The battery and microSD card are installed under the
battery cover, while the SIM card is installed below the battery.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure

the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
the key until the power-off image displays, then tap
Power off. Release Latch
7
To replace the battery cover: 2. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until
1. Position the battery cover over the battery compartment the card clicks into place. Make sure that the card’s gold
and press down until you hear a click. contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled
2. Confirm all edges of the cover are securely attached. corner of the card is positioned as shown.
SIM Card Overview

Install the SIM Card
Important!: Before removing or replacing the SIM card, make sure the
phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
Power off.
The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as

your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and
many other features.
Important!: The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by
scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small
children.
Installing and Removing the SIM card

To install the SIM card:
1. Confirm the battery is not currently installed within the
battery compartment. The battery can block the proper Remove the SIM Card
installation of the SIM card into the slot.
Getting Started 8
To remove the SIM card: 2. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it
1. If installed, remove the battery from its compartment. The catches with the push-click insertion. For more information
battery can block the proper removal of the SIM card from on how to use the SD card see “Using the SD Card” on
the slot. page 50.
2. Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket.
Important!: Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the
phone’s contacts.
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect it and nor
service will be available. If this happens, turn off the phone, remove
the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation.
Installing the microSD Memory Card

Your phone supports an optional (external) microSD™ or
microSDHC™ memory card for storage of media such as music,
pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use
with this mobile phone and other devices.
Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.

The microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up
to32GB.
Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.
1. Remove the battery cover and orient the card with the gold
strips facing down.
9
Removing the microSD Memory Card
1. Remove the battery cover. Installing Battery
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card
should pop partially out of the slot.
3. Remove the card from the slot.
Battery
Before using your phone for the first time, install the battery and
charge it fully.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the

phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
Power off.
Installing the Battery

1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs
on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone,
making sure the connectors align.
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).

Removing the Battery
Removing Battery
䊳 Insert your finger at the top end of the battery (3) and lift it
up and out of the battery compartment (4).
Getting Started 10
Charging the Battery
Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger.
Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall If the battery is not installed and the wall charger is connected, the
handset power cycles continuously preventing proper operation.
charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can
your phone. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your cause the phone to become damaged.
local Samsung dealer for further details.
Before using your phone for the first time, you must fully charge Important!: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is recommended
the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first
time.
4 hours.
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
Charging Head 2. Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover (1).
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory
jack (2).
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.
USB Cable
The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates
both its charge state and percent of charge.
5. Slide the cover to the power connector out to reveal the
power port.
Incorrect
Correct
11
Important!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a
touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your
finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a
metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage
the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more
information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 236.
Low Battery Indicator

When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, a warning tone sounds and the “Low battery” message
repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your
Correct Incorrect phone conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the
backlight.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically
Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for
connecting the charger. If the charger is incorrectly connected, turns off.
damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s
warranty. Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard
Your touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your The QWERTY keyboard is located below the screen.
finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic 1. Turn the phone over to where the logo appears at the
object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered
glass surface and void the warranty see “Health and Safety upper-right (1).
Information” on page 215.
2. Carefully grasp the base of the phone with both hands.
6. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power
plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s
connector from the phone.
Getting Started 12
3. While holding onto both sides of the phone, use your Extending Your Battery Life
thumbs to push against the bottom edge of the LCD (2). Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS
After the initial push, the LCD will then quickly slide away functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of
to reveal the QWERTY keyboard (3). helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
• Use the Power Control shortcut bar.
• Reduce your backlight on time.
• Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
• Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
• Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this
function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current
location; each query drains your battery.
• Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging
your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and
recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
• Turn off Automatic application sync.
• Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware functions such
as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting.
• Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions
have been consuming your battery resources.
• Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.
• Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background
applications that are still running. These minimized applications can,
over time, cause your device to “slow down”.
13
Power Control 4. Tap any of the icons on the Power Control shortcut bar to
Active applications, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, activate/deactivate the selected feature. Options include:
Location consent, or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS location, Sync, and Brightness.
drain your battery.
The Power Control shortcut bar was designed to quickly activate
(turn on), or deactivate (turn off) those functions or applications
that use the most battery power.
1. Press to navigate to
the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold an empty
area until the ADD TO HOME
SCREEN menu displays.
Wi-Fi Bluetooth GPS Sync Brightness
3. Tap Widgets ➔ Power
control. The Power Control
shortcut is added to the Note: A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active
(turned on). The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the
current screen. feature is deactivated (turned off).
Getting Started 14
Switching the Phone On or Off Dialing Options With a SIM card installed
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on 1. Press and hold (Power) until the phone switches
the device, (No Signal Available) appears at the top of the on. The phone searches for your network and after finding
screen. it.
At this point you can only make an emergency call (normal cell
2. Press and then tap PHONE (Phone).
phone service is not available).
䊳 Swipe the screen down to begin configuring different 3. Enter the phone number to dial then press .
phone parameters.
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the
– or – language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to
“Language & Keyboard Settings” on page 208.
Swipe the screen Up to access the main screen and begin
using your device. 4. Press and hold until the Phone options screen
appears.
Dialing Options Without a SIM card installed
1. Press and then tap PHONE (Phone). 5. Tap Power Off ( ).
2. Enter the phone number to dial then press . Locking and Unlocking the Phone
3. If you enter a non-emergency number, you are notified By default, the phone screen locks when the backlight turns off.
there is not network available. 䊳 Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass either
Up or Down to unlock the phone screen.
– or –
• Swiping the screen Up launches the Jump Key Settings screen
If you enter an emergency number, your call is passed
from where you can assign shortcuts to your Jump Key or configure
along to emergency services. the Lock screen shortcut.
• Swiping the lock screen Down launches the Home screen from
where you can access your Phone, Applications, or Contacts.
15
Creating a New Google Account
You should create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account
provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Google
Maps, Google Search, and the Android Market applications.
Before you are able to access Google applications, you must
Accesses the enter your account information. These applications sync between
Jump Key Settings your device and your online Google account.
screen
To create a new Google Account from your phone:
1. From the Home screen,
tap (Market).
2. Read the introduction and
tap Next ➔ Create to begin.
Accesses the
3. Follow the on-screen
Home screen
instructions to create a
Google Account.
– or –
Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use
of your phone. For more information, refer to “Setting up SIM Card If this is not the first time
Lock” on page 197.
you are starting the phone,
tap APPS (Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
Getting Started 16
Retrieving your Google Account Password
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If
To create a new Google Account from the Web: you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow
1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate to these instructions to retrieve it:
www.google.com. 1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate
to http://google.com/accounts.
2. On the main page, click Sign-in ➔ Create an account now.
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to create your free account.
3. Enter your account’s email address and click Submit.
4. Look for an email from Google in the email box you
provided, and respond to the email to confirm and activate • You can also use this site to recover your username.
4. Follow the remaining instructions to recover your
your new account.
password.
Signing into Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account
Voice Mail
(such as Android Market or Gmail). Setting Up Your Voice Mail
2. Click Next ➔ Sign in. Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as
3. Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted, activate your
information. voicemail account.
4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the Google
Important!: Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access.
servers to confirm your information.
5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by entering a
prefix for your @gmail.com email address.
17
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail: 2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice
mail center.
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) to access 1. Dial your wireless phone number.
the phone application.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk
2. Touch and hold the 1 key until the phone dials voice key on the phone you are using.
mail.
3. Enter your passcode.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
Visual Voicemail
3. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a
display name. voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want
without being limited to chronological order.
Accessing Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding
(Visual Voicemail).
1 on the keypad, by using the phone’s Application icon,
then touching the Voice Mail application. To access Voice Mail 2. Read the onscreen information and tap Next ➔ Done
using the menu: to activate Visual Voicemail if this is the first time it was
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) and then accessed.A list of the voicemail messages displays.
touch and hold 1 until the phone dials voice mail.
Note: You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature.
Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further
Note: Touching and holding 1 will launch Visual voicemail is it is already details.
active on your phone.
3. Touch a voicemail message to play it back.
Getting Started 18
Task Manager • SUMMARY displays a visual graph indicating the available and
used space within the Random Access Memory (RAM), Program,
Your phone can run applications simultaneously, with some and External SD card.
applications running in the background.
• HELP provides additional battery saving techniques.
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application
the biggest reason for this are background applications. These
are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS ➔
are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you (Task Manager).
see which of these applications are still active in the background 2. From the ACTIVE tab, tap Exit to close selected applications
but also easily lets you choose which applications are left
or tap Exit all to close all background running applications.
running and which are closed.
Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the
larger the energy drain on your battery.
Task Manger Overview

䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS ➔
(Task Manager). This screen contains the following tabs:
• ACTIVE display those currently active applications running on your
phone.
• PACKAGE displays any installed packages or applications from the
Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove
them from your phone.
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory for
either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory locations).
19
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines key features of your phone. It also describes • Multiple Messaging Options: Email, Audio Postcard, Instant Messaging,
the phone’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the Picture Messaging, Google Talk, Google Search, Video Messaging, Text
phone is in use. Messaging, Predictive Text
Features of Your Phone • Supports synchronizing with a corporate email account
• 3.0 megapixel camera and video with autofocus, multi shot.
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
significant features. The following list outlines a few of the • Front facing camera and Qik® for video chat
features included in your phone. • Brilliant widescreen TFT LCD (WVGA)
• Touch screen with virtual (onscreen) QWERTY keyboard • MP3 player with Multitasking features (Jump key)
• Full pushbutton QWERTY keyboard (located below screen) • Assisted GPS (TeleNav GPS Navigation)
• Optical Joystick • Group and Cloud Texting
• High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster • Social Networking integration
than the current 3G network technology. • Webkit-based browser
• Android 2.2 Froyo Operating system • Downloadable applications from the Android Market
• Compatible with Adobe® Flash® 10.1 • Up to 32GB expandable memory slot
• Wi-Fi Capability • Mobile Hotspot Capability
• USB Tethering-capable • T-Mobile TV
• Bluetooth enabled • Samsung Media Hub
• Full integration with Google applications (Gmail, YouTube, Google • Slacker Radio®
Maps)
Understanding Your Phone 20

Front View The following list correlates to the illustrations.
The following illustrations show the main elements of your 1. Jump key displays a list of quickly accessible and recently
phone: used functions. This list continually changes based on your
12 frequent use of various features and functions.
2. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the
1 11
surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect when
2 10
your face is pressed up against the screen, such as during
a phone call.
3 – While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and
9
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
3. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust
the screen brightness/contrast.
4 • In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device
to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.
• In dim light conditions, the device increases the screen brightness
to compensate.
4. Display shows all the information needed to operate your
phone, such as the connection status, received signal
5 8 strength, phone battery level, and time.
5. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.
6 7
21
6. Optical Joystick lets you highlight and select (tap) onscreen 13. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset
items. so you can listen to music.
7. Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other 14. Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in
callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them. standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice
It is also used to make voice note recordings. volume during a call. When receiving an incoming call,
8. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current pressing the volume key mutes the ring tone.
screen. From the Home screen it displays Add, Wallpaper,
Search, Notifications, Reorder, and Settings options. 13 14 15
9. Notification LED visually blinks to display notification of

actions such as: New SMS and MMS received, Missed Call,
New Email, and Power Charging. For more information,
refer to “LED settings” on page 207.
10. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while
facing the screen and allows you to video conference.
11. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed. Press
and hold to open the Notification panel.
12. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the
different ring tones or sounds offered by your phone.
16 17

15. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and
on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn off Silent mode, 1
Mobile data connection, Flight mode, or to turn the phone
on or off.
16. Camera key allows you to activate the camera and
camcorder and take pictures and videos.
17. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a
power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data
cable.
Back View of Your Phone 2
The following illustration shows the external elements of your
1. Camera lens is used to take photos.
phone:
2. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and
other sounds offered by your phone.
23
Phone Display Display settings
Your phone’s display provides information about the phone’s In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the
status, and is the interface to the features of your phone. The wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.
display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery 䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
status and time. Icons display at the top of the phone when an
(Settings) ➔ Display. For more information, refer to
incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a
specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays “Display Settings” on page 194.
notifications, and Shortcut icons: Phone, Apps/Home, and Status Bar
Contacts.
The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,
Signal strength signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays
Connection Status notifications about incoming messages and calls and other
Battery status
actions.
Status Bar Time
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display
screen:
Google Search
Indicator Icons
Notification
area This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display
Status and Indicator area:
area Home Screen
Displays your current signal strength. The greater the
number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Shortcuts
Indicates that the Flight Mode is active. You cannot
Primary send or receive any calls or access online information.
Shortcuts

Indicates there is no signal available. Shows your current battery only has three percent
power remaining and will immediately shutdown.
Represented as a blinking icon.
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Displays when connected to the GPRS network.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
Displays when a call is on hold. the GPRS network.
Displays when connected to the EDGE network.
Displays when you have missed an incoming call.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Displays when connected to the 3G network.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward.

For more information, refer to “Configuring Voice Calls” Displays when your phone is communicating with
on page 189. the 3G network.
Displays your current battery charge level. Icon Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.
100%
shown is fully charged.
Displays your current battery charge level is Displays when your phone is communicating with the
very low. HSPA+ network.
25
Displays when the phone is connected to a computer Displays when all sounds are silenced and Vibrate is
using a supported USB cable connection. set to either Always or Only in SIlent mode. For more
information, refer to “Sound Settings” on page 192.
Displays when there is a new text message.
Displays when data synchronization and application
sync is active and synchronization is in progress
Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
be delivered.
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and
Displays when there is a new voicemail message. enabled.
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active
Displays when there is a new visual voicemail and communicating with an external device.
message.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected to and
Displays in the notifications window when there is communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP)
a new Email message.
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is no
Displays when the phone is in Silent mode. All sounds communication with a target Wireless Access Point
except media and alarms are silenced, and (WAP).
Vibrate mode is not active. For more information, refer to
“Silent mode” on page 192. Displays when the Mobile AP Hotspot feature is active
and communicating. For more information, refer to
Displays when an alarm is set. “Mobile AP” on page 174.
For more information, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on
page 178. Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and
communicating. For more information, refer to
“Tethering” on page 184.

Displays when the phone’s location feature is on Notification Bar
and available for location-based services such as The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync
GPS Navigation. status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can
Displays when your phone’s GPS is on and expand this area to provide more detailed information about the
communicating. current onscreen notification icons.
1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active and
in use. drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
Displays when the external SD card (internal
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from 2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated
the phone and is now ready for either removal or application (2).
formatting.
Displays when the External SD card is being prepared
for mounting to the device. This is required for
communication with the External SD card.
Displays when the phone has detected an active USB
connection and is in a USB Debugging mode or the
microSD card has been improperly removed.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see

“Changing Your Settings” on page 181.
27
Back Key
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by
pressing and then tapping ( ) Notifications. The Back key ( ) returns you to the previously active screen.
If the onscreen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the
Clearing Notifications keyboard.
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel: Menu Key
1. Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then The Menu key ( ) activates an available menu function for the
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the current screen or application. When on the Home screen, the
Notifications panel following menu options are available:
• Add ( ) adds one of the following functions to a selected screen:
2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers.
Function Keys
• Wallpaper ( ) lets you to customize the current screen’s
Your phone comes equipped with five main function keys that wallpaper image by choosing from either a Gallery, Live Wallpaper, or a
can be used on any screen: Home, Jump Key/Recent Applications, Wallpaper gallery).
Back, Menu, and Search.
– You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder, from any of the
Home Key available images within the device’s Wallpaper gallery, or from the
The Home key ( ) takes you back to your Home screen animated Live Wallpapers.
(#4 of the 7 total available screens). • Search ( ) displays the Google Search box that you can use to
Recent Applications - Jump Key search for a key term both on the phone and online.
• Notifications ( ) allows you to expand popup notifications area to
The Jump key ( ) launches a screen from where you can
access both the Jump key settings/Lockscreen shortcut and provide more detailed information about the current onscreen
quickly access a recent list of recently used applications. notification icons.
• Reorder ( ) allows you to add or remove extended screens from
your device. You can have up to seven extended screens.
• Settings ( ) provides quick access to the device’s settings menu. 2. Tap Voice Search ( ) ➔ Speak now to launch the Voice
– The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then Search function.
tapping APPS ➔ Settings.
Using Google Search
Search Key
Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both
Lift open the screen (page 12) to reveal the Search key ( ) your device and on the Web.
displays the Google Search box that can be used to search for
either a key term both on the phone and online. In some 1. Press to launch the Google Search box.
instances, this key opens a search box specific only to the 2. Tap to select a search area:
current application.
• All searches your device, the Web, and the Android Market for your
Search Voice Search search term.
Options (speech to text) • Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google
search engine.
• Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market.
• Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts
Search entries.
Field 3. Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of
suggestions, phone search results, or previously chosen
search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the
1. Press to launch the Google Search box. appropriate application.
– or – – or –
Press and tap APPS ➔ . Tapping Voice Search ( ) lets you speak into your
device's microphone to enter a search term.
29
Using Additional Voice Search Functions • note to self [message] allows you to search for a note save to your
For more information, refer to: Memo Pad.
Home Screen
http://www.google.com/mobile/voice-actions/.
The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications
From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following words to
on your phone. There are seven available panels, each populated
access additional features:
with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize each of
• voice actions (such as: [your query]) allows you to search the web by
these panels.
speaking the search parameters.
• listen to [artist/song/album] allows you to begin listening to the Status Bar
selected song on Slacker radio.
• send text to [recipient] [message] allows you to open the Messaging Google search
screen. Notification bar/Widget
• navigate to [address/city/business name] allows you to receive area
directions via Google maps™. Use either an Address name, Business
name, business type, or other navigation information to get the desired Status
directions. area Home Screen
• call [name] allows you to open the phone dial and automatically
• send email to [recipient] [subject] allows you to open your email
account and compose a new email message. Shortcuts
• map of [location] allows you to view a map of an area via Google Primary
maps. Use either an Address name, Business name, zip code, or other Shortcuts
navigation information.
• go to [website] allows you to navigate to any component of your
device.

• Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user
Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress), screens.
new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and
Text/MMS messages. • Google search is an onscreen Internet search engine powered by
– These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the Google™. Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can
Status bar area) and display important user information. verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.
– This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the • Widgets are self-contained onscreen applications (not shortcuts).
Status bar (page 27) or by accessing the Notifications panel [ > These can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or
Notifications ( )]. extended).
• Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the • Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as
device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 3G, 4G and Camera, YouTube, Voicemail, Contacts, Phone, Email, Market, etc.
Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc. These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.
• Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information – Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,
about notifications and device status, and allows access to application the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.
Widgets.
– The Application screens can be accessed by tapping APPS
• Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen
( APPS ) from the Primary shortcuts area.
width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other
customization features. – Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number
– There are seven available extended screens (panels) each of which of times.
may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens
share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts.
– The current screen is indicated at the top by a thin square (quadrangle).
Up to seven (7) total screens are available.
31
• Primary Shortcuts: are three shortcuts present throughout all of the
available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device
or launch any of the following functions:
– Phone ( PHONE ) launches the phone-related screen functions
(Dialer, Call logs, Favorites, and Voicemail). Google
Search bar
– Apps/Home toggles functionality between the Home and Application
screens.
• Tap Applications ( APPS ) to access the Application screens
loaded with every available local application.
• While in the Applications screens, tap the Home icon ( HOME ) Counter displays
to easily return to the Home screen. the currently
– Contacts ( CONTACTS ) launches the Contacts-related screens active screen
(Contacts, Groups, History, and Updates).
As you transition from screen to screen, the quadrangle (located
at the top) highlights to indicate the current page number.

Screen Navigation • Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the
the features of your phone and enter characters. The following Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys
conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example,
action in the procedures. you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone.
• Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on
Navigating Through the Screens
the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon
The following terms describe the most common hardware and to open the application. A light touch works best.
onscreen actions. • Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available
Press and hold Tap Touch and hold options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: press and hold
from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.
• Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This
finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when
flicking through contacts or a message list.
• Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to
scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the
Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.
• Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start
to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target
position.
33
• Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom
out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to
Swipe or slide
zoom out.)
and Drag
• Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom
in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to
Flick zoom in.)
Pinch (Zoom Out)
Spread (Zoom In)

Rotate
• Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to

landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to
landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard,
or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling. Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For more
information, refer to “Customizing the Screens” on page 45.

Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and
features are accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone defaults with seven home screens.
There are two ways to navigate through a menu:
• Using your finger
• Using the Optical Joystick
Selecting Menu Items Using your Fingers Navigation - Finger
As you navigate through the menu, you activate menu options by
tapping the onscreen entry. Select any option by tapping it. Navigation - Optical Joystick
Selecting Menu Items Using the Optical Joystick
The Optical Joystick acts as a dual touch-sensitive mouse
and OK/Enter key. As you navigate through a menu, options
are highlighted. Select any option by highlighting it and
pressing (Optical Joystick).
The direction of your onscreen movements while using the
Optical Joystick is determined by the current orientation of your
device.
• When your QWERTY keyboard is visible, your device is placed into
Landscape mode.
• When the keyboard is hidden, your device is placed into Portrait mode.
35
Navigating Through the Application Menus Using Sub-Menus
There are three default Application Menus available. As you add Sub-menus are available from within most screen and
more applications from the Android Marketplace, more screens applications.
are created to house these new apps. 1. Press . A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the
1. Press and tap APPS (Applications). The first phone screen.
Application Menu displays.
2. Tap an option.
• To close the Applications screen, tap HOME (Home) or
press .
2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.
3. Tap any of the onscreen icons to launch the associated
application.
Sub-Menu items

Using Context Menus Accessing Recently-Used Applications
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that 1. Press (Jump Key) to open the recently-used
apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to applications window.
menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on
your desktop computer. Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Jump Key
䊳 Touch and hold an item onscreen to open its context menu. Settings.
2. A pop-up displays the

seven most recently used
applications. The list is
arranged from most
Context recently used at the top.
Menu
3. Tap a list entry to launch
the recent application.
Applications
The Application menu provides
quick access to the most
frequently used applications.
Applications display on each of
the three panels on the
Applications screens.
37
The following table contains a description of each application AllShare
available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the
Applications screens. If the application is already described in Allows you to share your on-device media content
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to with other external devices using DLNA (Digital Living
that particular section is provided. For more information on Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare™ technology.
navigating through the Application icons, see “Navigating Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.
Through the Application Menus” on page 36. For more information, refer to “AllShare” on page 134.
Amazon MP3
Accounts & sync
Launches the Amazon MP3 music download service
Allows you to add applications and determine which
where you can download DRM-Free (digital rights
type of account information you want to synchronize
management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.
with your Contact list. For more information, refer to
For more information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on
“Accounts and Synchronization” on page 203.
page 125.
Alarm & Clocks
AppPack
Allows you to set an alarm, configure and view the
Installs the T-Mobile AppPack that allows you to
World clock, use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The
discover those applications that are compatible
applications display in a tabular format and quickly
specifically with your phone.
accessed with the touch of a finger.
For more information, refer to “AppPack” on page 136.
For more information refer to Alarms & Clocks on
page 178, World clock on page 179, Stopwatch on
page 180, or Setting a Timer on page 180 of this user
guide.

Calculator Cloud Texting
Launches the onscreen calculator application. The The term "cloud" refers to the idea that there is no
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; hardware or software required for this function and that
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can the operation of your texting program is web-based.
also use this as a scientific calculator. For more information, refer to “Cloud Texting” on
For more information, refer to “Calculator” on page 137. page 107.
Calendar DRIVE
DriveSmart
S M T W T F SMART
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12
Launches a calendar application that syncs to your Launches the DriveSmart application that can be used to
14 15 16 17 18 19
Facebook™, Google™, or Microsoft Exchange work reduce distractions from your phone by silencing
calendars. notifications, routing calls to voicemail and customizing
auto responses to both callers and text message
For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 177. respondents notifying them that your driving.
Camera For more information, refer to “DriveSmart” on page 139.
Launches the built-in 3.0 megapixel camera application Email
from where you can take a picture with either the front or
rear facing cameras. In addition to taking photos, the Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Server-
built-in camera also doubles as a camcorder that also based) work email and Internet email accounts (such as
allows you to record, view, and send high definition Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). For more information, refer to
videos. For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” “Email” on page 108.
on page 116. Facebook
Launches the Facebook Web page via the browser. For
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the camera will take
and store photos. more information, refer to “Facebook” on page 140.
39
Files Group Texting
Lets you view supported image files and text files on your Provides the ability to create a group category,
microSD card. Organize and store data, images, and more populate that group with desired contacts (ex: Friends,
in your own personal file folders. Files are stored to the Coworkers, etc..), and then send a single text message
memory card in separate (user defined) folders. to all members of that group (similar to an email blast).
For more information, refer to “Files” on page 125. For more information, refer to “Group Texting” on
page 106.
Gallery
Highlight
Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in
the microSD card. For more information, refer to “The This downloadable application/widget allows you to stay
Gallery” on page 126. up to date on relevant news, Android Market apps and
games (specific to your phone), T-Mobile ringtones,
Gmail CallerTunes and more. For more information, refer to
Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail “Highlight” on page 141.
(Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured Latitude
when you first set up your phone. For more information,
refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 114. Lets you see your friends’ locations and share yours
with them. The application also lets you see your
Google Search friends’ locations on a map or in a list. It also lets you
Provides an onscreen Internet search engine powered by send instant messages and emails, make phone calls,
Google™. For more information, refer to “Using Google and get directions to your friends’ locations.
Search” on page 29. For more information, refer to “Latitude” on page 142.

Maps Memo
Launches a Web-based dynamic map that helps you find Creates new text memos. For more information, refer to
local businesses, locate friends, view maps and get “Memo” on page 147.
driving directions. For more information, refer to “Maps”
Messaging
on page 142.
Provides access to text and multimedia messaging (SMS
Market and MMS). For more information, refer to “Creating and
Allows you to find and download free and for-purchase Sending Messages via Universal Composer” on
applications on Android Market. For more information, page 100.
refer to “Downloading a New Google Application” on
Mini Diary
page 145.
Allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a
Media Hub photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable
Provides one-stop access to the hottest movies and TV life event.
programs that you can rent or buy and watch anytime, For more information, refer to “Mini Diary” on page 148.
anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on
page 129. My Account
Media Room Provides you with account specific information such as:
current status, current activity, Bill Summary, Plan
Provides a one-stop access point for all your local media Services, Find a Retail Store, and FAQ’s Info. For more
such as Music, Video and Slacker radio. For more information, refer to “My Account” on page 149.
information, refer to “Using the Media Room” on
page 126.
41
My Device Setup Wizard
Allows you to configure device settings, view Tips Provides access to a single menu screen from where
Tricks, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or you can configure settings such as Accounts, Themes,
Wallpapers, or view battery storage information. For more Jump Key Settings, and Connectivity. For more
information, refer to “My Device” on page 150. information, refer to “Setup Wizard” on page 154.
Navigation T-Mobile Mall
Launches a Web-based navigation application. This downloadable application provides access to several
phone features and tunes. For more information, refer to
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be “T-Mobile Mall” on page 154.
wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
T-Mobile TV
For more information, refer to “Navigation” on page 151. Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone. This
Places application is a subscription service. For more
information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 155.
Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps.
When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business Talk
or person, find out more information about the business, Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that
see coupons, public responses, and more. For more lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for
information, refer to “Places” on page 153. free. For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on
Settings page 115.
Accesses the device’s built-in Settings menu. For more
information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 181.

Task Manager ThinkFree Office
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
on your phone, and to end running applications to extend compatible office suite. This application provides a
battery life. central place for managing your documents online or
For more information, refer to “Task Manager” on offline.
page 155. For more information, refer to “ThinkFree Office” on
page 156.
TeleNav GPS Navigator
This driving aid provides both audible and visual Tips & Tricks
navigation instructions for GPS navigation. For more Use the learn functionality to understand more about the
information, refer to “TeleNav GPS Navigator” on features and functions on your phone.
page 156. For more information, refer to “Tips & Tricks” on
Theme Changer page 157.
This applications allows you to change the phone’s Twitter
current theme. This function is also accessible via the Twitter is a social networking and microblogging
Setup Wizard. For more information, refer to “Theme service that allows you make or answer questions by
Changer” on page 156. sending short text messages up to 140 characters in
length, called "tweets", to your friends, or "followers."
For more information, refer to “Twitter” on page 157.
43
Universal Composer Web
Allows you to compose messages that contain for more Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is
than your everyday text and picture, but also multimedia fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to
files and Google Map (GPS) information. Think of it as an enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.
all-in one messaging function. For more information, refer For more information, refer to “Web” on page 161.
to “Messages” on page 100.
Wi-Fi Calling
Video Chat
Provides the ability to use your available Wi-Fi data
Allows you to record and share live videos on your device connection to make outbound calls that do not
with your friends, family, and your favorite social count against your phone minutes. Similar to VOIP
networks. For more information, refer to “Qik Video Chat” (Voice Over IP). For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
on page 158. Calling” on page 58.
Visual Voicemail YouTube
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser.
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message For more information, refer to “YouTube” on page 132.
they want without being limited to chronological order.
For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on
page 18.
Voice Search
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition
software and initiates a Google search based on the
recognized text. For more information, refer to “Voice
Search” on page 159.

Customizing the Screens Adding and Deleting Screens
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one screens and then add them back later.
screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms
of media, while another screen might contain communication Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.
apps such as Gmail and IM.
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following: Important!: Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least
one screen.
• Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens
• Adding and Removing Shortcuts To delete a screen:
• Adding and Removing Widgets
1. Press ➔ and
• Creating Folders
then tap Reorder ( ).
• Changing the Background (Wallpapers)
2. Touch and drag the
undesired screen down
to the Remove tab
( ).
3. Press to return to
the main Home screen.
45
To add a screen: 1. Press and then tap APPS (Applications).
1. Press ➔ and then tap Reorder ( ). 2. Press and then tap View type ➔ Customizable grid.
2. Tap the Add icon ( ). The newly added screen appears 3. Press and then tap Reorder. A box outline then
as the last page. appears around the application icons.
3. Press to return to the main Home screen. 4. Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.
Rearranging the Screens 5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it to its new
1. Press ➔ and then tap Reorder ( ). location.
2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new 6. Press and then tap Save.
location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right 7. Tap to return to the Home screen.
is screen position #7.
Managing Shortcuts
Rearranging Application Shortcuts
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully
In addition to being able to rearrange screens, you can also touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the
rearrange the order of the shortcuts within the three default screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the
Application screens. This way you can place your favorite icons adjacent screen.
If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new
on the first application page so you don’t have to scroll through screen and then add the selected shortcut.
page after page.

To add a shortcut from the Applications screen: To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1. Press to go to the 1. Press to go to the Home screen.
Home screen. 2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
2. Select a location (screen) 3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Shortcuts.
for your new shortcut by
4. Tap a selection from the available list.
scrolling across your
To delete a shortcut:
available screens until you
1. Press to go to the Home screen.
reach the desired one.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from
3. Tap APPS
its location on the current screen.
(Applications) to reveal all
your current available 3. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab ( ) and release
applications. By default, it.
applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid. Adding and Removing Widgets
4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on
application. any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.
5. Touch and hold the onscreen icon. The new shortcut then To add a Widget:
appears to hover over the current screen. 1. Press to go to the Home screen.
6. While still holding the onscreen icon, position it on the 2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock 3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Widgets.
the shortcut into its new position. 4. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current screen.
47
To remove a Widget: Creating and Managing a Folder
1. Touch and hold a Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together
Widget until it unlocks on the workspace.
from the current To create a new onscreen folder:
screen. 1. Press to go to the Home screen.
2. Drag the widget over 2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
the Remove tab ( ) 3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Folders.
and release it.
4. Tap an available folder type and place it on the current
• As you place the Widget screen.
into the Trash, both items
turn red. Renaming a folder
• This action doesn’t delete 1. Tap the desired folder you want to rename.
the Widget, it just
removes it from the 2. With the folder open, touch and hold the Folder title bar
current screen. (top of the open Folder window) until the RENAME FOLDER
To place a widget onto a different screen: pop-up displays.
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.
3. Tap the folder name field, enter a new title for this folder
2. Drag it to the edge of your screen. and tap OK.
3. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until it turns light
blue.
4. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.
5. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.
Deleting a folder • Tap Wallpaper gallery, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper
1. Touch and hold a desired folder. This unlocks it from its image, then tap Set wallpaper.
location on the current screen.
2. Drag the folder over the Remove tab ( ) and release it.
Managing Wallpapers
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default
phone wallpapers).
Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery

power.
To change the current wallpaper:

1. Press to go to the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Wallpapers.
4. Select a Wallpaper:
• Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap Save.
• Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,
once done tap Set wallpaper.
49
Section 3: Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD™ (SD) or microSDHC™ card SD card Overview
(also referred to as a memory card) to expand available memory After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your
space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images, computer to access and manage the SD card.
music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section
addresses the features and options of your device’s SD Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and
functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode. install the USB drivers.
• microSD card storage: up to 2GB in size
microSD Icon Indicators
• SDHC card storage: up to 32GB in size
Using the SD Card The following icons show your microSD card connection status at
a glance:
There are several methods for using the SD card:
1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos, • the card has been unmounted (released from
or other types of files and media). use) from the device.
2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other
• the card is being prepared for use and for
dependant media or applications.
mounting.
Important!: The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and Video
functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD card. Your device • the card has been improperly removed.
can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.
Memory Card 50
4. Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable
Important!: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or
transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data. to the computer.
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD
card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs 5. Tap Mass storage ➔ Connect USB storage ➔ OK. Both the
out while you are using the microSD card.
phone and computer display icons to show that the device
Mounting the SD Card is mounted. As soon as the connection is established a
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must drive letter is assigned to the phone’s storage device.
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card 6. Later, tap Turn Off to close the USB connection between the
establishes a USB connection with your computer. phone and your computer, then disconnect the USB cable.
Important!: You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card. Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the
To mount the SD card:
SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot (For more
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”
SD card and phone storage.
on page 9.)
2. Tap Unmount SD card ➔ OK.
2. Press and hold to turn on the phone.
3. When the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays
3. Verify Ask on connection is set as the default USB setting.
and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list, open
• Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
the phone and remove the SD card. For more information,
Applications ➔ USB settings.
refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card” on page 9.
• Tap Ask on connection.
51
SD card Memory Status Factory Data Reset
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card: From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ the factory default settings.
SD card and phone storage. The available memory 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
displays under the Total space and Available space Privacy.
headings. 2. Tap Factory data reset. This action erases all data from
Erasing Files from the SD card your phone except current system software and bundled
applications, or SD card files such as music or photos.
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information, 3. Tap Reset phone ➔ Erase everything.
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 51.
SD card and phone storage ➔ Unmount SD card ➔ OK.
3. Tap Format SD card ➔ Format SD card ➔ Erase everything
to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all
the data stored on it.
Memory Card 52
Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List
This section describes features and functionality associated with

Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu, the
making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not
store contact information. answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not
sent to voice mail.
Displaying Your Phone Number
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Ending a Call
About phone ➔ Status. Your phone number displays in the 䊳 Briefly tap key to end the call.
Phone number field.
Note: To redial a recent number, tap PHONE (Phone) ➔ CALL LOG,
Note: The phone’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing and locate a number from the list, and tap .
then tapping APPS ➔ (Settings).
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen,
Making a Call You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the
green bar within the Status bar.
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM
card or to the phone’s memory. These entries are referred to as In Call Notification
the Contacts list.
1. Press and then tap PHONE (Phone).
2. Enter the phone number to dial then press .
䊳 If you make a mistake while dialing, tap to clear the
last digit. Touch and hold to clear the entire
sequence.
53
Dialing Options • Add 2 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a
When you enter numbers on the 2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing
Keypad, you will see three after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed).
on-screen options. • Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone
waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be
From the keypad screen, use
manually sent by tapping Send.
one of the following options:
Answering a Call
• Call ( ) to call the entered
number. When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the
incoming call image.
• Delete ( ) to delete digits
from the current number. The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts
List, displays.
• Voice Dialer ( ) to launch
the voice recognition application. 䊳 At the incoming call screen:
• Touch and slide to the right to answer the call.
To view additional dialing
options, tap (Menu). • Touch and slide to the left to reject the call.
• Add to Contacts to add the
• Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and
current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry. touch a predefined rejection message.
• Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the
• Send message to send the current caller a text message while still
entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone
maintaining the current call active.
number, if available.
Call Functions and Contacts List 54

To add a prefix:
1. Tap Prefix dialling list ➔ Create. The list is empty until you
add a prefix.
2. Enter a prefix number using the keypad and tap Save. The
Touch and drag
upward to reject
prefix displays in the Prefix dialing list.
Touch and slide
with a message 3. Tap the circle icon beside the prefix. A green icon indicates
right to answer
the call the selection of a prefix.
Touch and slide
left to reject 4. Each time you dial a number, the activated prefix is
the call automatically added to the dialed number.
5. Touch another prefix in the Prefix dialing list to change
Prefix Dialing prefixes.
When activated, this feature automatically prepends a string of To delete a prefix:
numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number. This
1. From the Home screen, press (Menu) and then tap
feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an area
code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one ➔ Call settings ➔ All calls ➔ Prefix dialing ➔ Prefix
prefix. dialling list.
1. From the Home screen, press (Menu) and then tap 2. Press ➔ Delete.
(Settings) ➔ Call settings ➔ All calls ➔ Prefix dialing. 3. Tap selected prefixes to remove from them from the list.
2. Tap the Enable prefix dialling field. A check mark indicates – or –
the Prefix dialling feature is active. Tap Select all.
55
4. Tap Delete. 2. Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature
International Calls adds an automatic two-second pause.
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone), then 3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be
touch and hold . The + symbol displays. dialed automatically after the second pause.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple
code, and phone number. 2-sec pauses.
• If you make a mistake, tap once to delete a single digit.
4. Tap .
• Touch and hold to delete all digits.
3. Tap . Wait Dialing
Pause Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing

sequence means that the phone
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with waits until it hears a dial tone
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone before proceeding with the next
numbers. sequence of numbers.
• 2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after
a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a
tap PHONE (Phone)
comma (,).
• Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Send . This is and use the on-screen
indicated in the number string as a semicolon (;). keypad to enter the
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) and use phone number.
the on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.

2. Press and then tap Add wait. This feature causes the Setting Up Speed Dial Entries
phone to require your acceptance before sending the next
Important!: Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other
set of entered digits. number can be assigned to this slot.
3. Tap .
4. Once prompted, tap Send to dial the remaining digits.
tap PHONE .
Redialing the Last Number 2. Press and then tap
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed, Speed dial setting. The
received, or missed if the caller is identified. Speed dial screen
To recall any of these numbers: displays a virtual keypad
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) and tap with the numbers 1
. through 9.
2. Tap the CALL LOG tab to display the list of recent calls. 3. Tap an unassigned
3. Tap the name/number and tap Call . number. The Contacts
– or – screen displays.
Tap to the right of the name/number. 4. Tap a listed contact to
Speed Dialing assign it to the selected speed dial location. The selected
contact number/image is displayed in the speed dial
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List,
you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily number box.
whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric
key.
57
Changing a Speed Dial Entry Making a Call Using Speed Dial
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone). You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the
2. Press and then tap Speed dial setting. Contacts List for speed dialing.
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone).
Important!: The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number 2. Touch and hold a speed dial location (numbers 2-9, or 1 if
cannot be assigned to this slot.
you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial.
3. Press and then tap Change order. 3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, access the
4. In a single motion, touch and drag an entry over another keypad and tap ➔ Speed dial setting and touch a
location on the virtual keypad. speed dial number to view the assigned phone number.
5. Tap Save to store the new assignment. Wi-Fi Calling
6. Press to return to the previous screen. Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers with a Wi-Fi
capable phone. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage
Removing a Speed Dial Entry
issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone). limited. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network
2. Press and then tap Speed dial setting. count against available rate plan minutes.
3. Touch and hold an on-screen speed dial location and The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:
select Remove from the context menu. • Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current
in-home coverage experience
– or –
• Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere you can connect to an available Wi-Fi
Press ➔ Remove. Tap an entry and select Remove. network.
4. Press to return to the previous screen.

Launching Wi-Fi Calling
Important!: Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching
Wi-Fi Calling.
Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point.
Activating Wi-Fi:
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the
1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Wireless and
status bar. The network names and security settings (Open
network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks
2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. A checkmark displays to indicate
display in the Wi-Fi networks section.
activation.
3. Tap an available WAP (Wireless Access Point) from within Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.
the Wi-Fi networks area of the page. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete connection. Wi-Fi Connected
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi-Fi calling communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
when outside the United States, the Data Roaming feature on your
device must be turned off. Wi-Fi Communication Issue
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a
communication issue with the target Wireless
Access Point (WAP).
59
When Action Then
(Wi-Fi Calling).
Displays on the You are connected to the
3. If prompted to register onto the T-Mobile network prior to
screen status T-Mobile network and can
use, tap Register to complete the process. bar. make Wi-Fi calls.
4. Tap the slider to Does not display You are charged normal calling
activate Wi-Fi on the screen rate minutes. For more
Calling. The status bar. information, refer to “Activating
Wi-Fi” on page 181.
slider shows On.
Your device
5. Use the phone Dialer, call log, or contacts list to make a
connects to the
Wi-Fi Calling call. For more information, refer to “Making a Call” on
T-Mobile activation page 53.
Network. slider
6. Confirm you established a Wi-Fi calling connection to the
T-Mobile network by making sure appears at the top
of the screen.

In Call Options Adjusting the Call Volume
Your phone provides a number of features that are available for During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone,
use during a call. to adjust the earpiece volume.
䊳 Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and
the Down volume key to decrease the level.
– or –
From the screen during a call, press the Up Volume key.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using
these keys.
Place a call
on hold
Dials the Placing a Call on Hold
number
Adds a You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your
new call Ends the network supports this service, you can also make another call
call
while a call is in progress.
Activates Mutes or
speakerphone Unmutes To place a call on hold:
Activates the call 1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.
Bluetooth headset
2. Tap Resume to activate the call that is on hold.
61
To make a new call while a call is in progress: Muting a Call
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it 1. Tap Mute (Mute off) so the other caller cannot hear you
up in Call history. speaking.
2. Tap Add call to dial the second call. 2. Tap Mute (Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your
3. Dial the new phone number and tap . conversation.
To switch between the two calls: Switching to Bluetooth Headset

䊳 Tap Swap. 1. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of
The In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The speaker by tapping Headset (Headset).
active call displays a green background behind the 2. At the prompt, tap Yes to enable Bluetooth if it is not
number. already activated.
Turning the Speakerphone on and off More In-call Options
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the
these steps: Contacts list, or create a Memo.
1. Tap Speaker (Speaker off) to turn the speakerphone on. Viewing the Contacts List
2. Tap Speaker
(Speaker on) to turn the speakerphone off. During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.
1. Press and then tap Contacts.
Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is teal. When the
speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray. 2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.
3. Press to return to the active call.

Creating a Memo During a Call 3. Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note). tap . The first caller is placed on hold.
1. Press and then tap Memo. 4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and
2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save. tap Merge. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party
Automatic screen lock call and display in the order in which they were called.
If you configured your phone with the Automatic screen lock Important!: A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi-party
option, during a call your screen locks to prevent accidental line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session
screen presses. To temporarily unlock the screen press the lock and held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You can
swap or place each multi-party call on hold.
key (on the right side of the phone).
Multi-Party calls Having a Private Conversation With One Participant
Making a Multi-Party Call When you have two participants
A multi-party call is a network service that allows up to six in a multi-party session, you
people to participate in a multi-party or conference call. might be necessary to place one
of those participants on hold so
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact that a private conversation can be
T-Mobile customer service. held with a single caller. While
Setting up a Multi-Party Call you are in a multi-party call:
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone).
2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap .
63
1. Press and then tap Manage Conference Call. Call Waiting
2. Tap (Split) adjacent to the participants you would You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in
like to split from the current call. The list displays the progress, if this service is supported by the network and you
must have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.
callers in the order they were dialed.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For
3. Tap the number for the participant in which you want to
more information, refer to “Configuring Voice Calls” on
speak privately. page 189.
You can now talk privately to that person while the other To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:
participants can continue to converse with each other. If 1. In a single motion, touch and slide it to the right to
there is only one other participant, that person is placed on
answer the new incoming call.
hold.
4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Merge icon. This Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is
placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.
action joins both participants into a single multi-party call.
If the multi-party call participants can now hear each other. 2. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the
Dropping One Participant new caller on hold and activates the previous call. The
1. Press and then tap Manage Conference Call. active call displays with a green background.
2. From within an active conference all tap End to the right 3. Tap Swap again to switch back.
of the party. The participant is disconnected and you can
continue the call with the other participant.
3. Tap to end the current call.

Call Logs Tab Accessing the Call Log Tab
The Call logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts 1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) ➔
entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Call logs CALL LOG tab.
tab make redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually
2. Tap an entry to view available options.
updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the
beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the
Note: The CALL LOG tab only records calls that occur while the phone is
bottom of the list. turned on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays included in your calling history.
phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).
Displays when a call is in progress.
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.

Displays when a call was missed.
Indicates any received calls that were answered.
Indicates a missed call.
65
Accessing Call Logs from The Notifications Area Call Log - Caller Overview
1. Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar.
Call options (tap)
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1). CALL LOG screen
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen (2).
Tip: Press and then tap Notifications to open the panel. Entry-specific
context menu
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also (touch and hold)
choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on
how they are touched.
• Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the call options screen: Altering Numbers from the Call Log
• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number. If you need to make a call from the CALL LOG screen and you
• Message allows you to create a new text message to the selected need to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the
entry. appropriate prefix by prepending the number.
• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration. 1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) ➔
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your CALL LOG tab.
Contacts.
• Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu: 2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific
• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number. context menu.
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the 3. Tap Edit number before call.
selected entry.
4. Edit the number using the on-screen dialpad or delete
• Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone
number prior to redial. digits by pressing to erase the numbers.
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your 5. Tap once the number has been changed.
Contacts.
• View contact to view the information for the currently stored
Contacts entry.
• Send contact information to send the Log entry information via
text message.
• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be
blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.
• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.
67
Erasing the Call Log Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current When you are unable to
entries from the Call logs list. answer a call for any reason
To clear a single entry from the list: and your screen is locked, the
number of missed calls are
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) ➔
displayed on the Lock screen
CALL LOG tab. immediately after a call is
2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete. missed.
To clear all entries from the list: To view a missed call

immediately:
1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone) ➔
1. Press to
CALL LOG tab.
reactive the screen.
2. Press and then tap Delete.
2. Touch and drag the
3. Tap Select all ➔ Delete ➔ OK.
slider (with the number
of missed calls on it)
down the screen. The main Home screen is then displayed.

Section 5: Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input method Selecting the Text Input Method
when entering characters into your phone. This section also The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two
describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the locations:
amount of key strokes associated with entering text. Your phone
comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the Settings Menu:
phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Locale
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text. and text ➔ Select input method.
Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry
Text Input field:
options to make the task of text entry that much easier.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and hold
Text Input Methods
the text input field to open the context-menu.
There are three text input methods available:
2. Select the desired input method (Swype or Samsung
• QWERTY keyboard: located below the screen, can be used at any
time to enter text and override the current text input method. For more keypad).
information, refer to “Language & Keyboard Settings” on
page 208.
• Samsung Keypad: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be Default Onscreen
used in both portrait and landscape orientation. Input Method
• Swype (default): a new way to enter text on touch screens.
Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
The on-screen QWERTY keypad only works in portrait mode.
Landscape use must be done via the physical QWERTY keyboard.
69
Configuring SWYPE Settings
Important!: At any time, you can access the QWERTY keyboard and directly
enter text. For more information, refer to “Accessing the QWERTY 1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Locale and text
Keyboard” on page 12.
➔ Swype.
Entering Text Using Swype 2. Locate the Preferences section to alter these settings:
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter • Language: allows you to select the current text input language.
a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting Default language is US English.
your finger between words. SWYPE uses error correcting • Word prediction: predicts words as you are typing.
algorithms and a language model to predict the next word. • Audio feedback: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system. application.
The onscreen keyboard options are different between the Android • Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter
keyboard and Swype onscreen input methods. text using the keypad.
Enabling and Configuring SWYPE • Enable tip indicator: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.
3. Locate the Swype Advanced Settings section to alter these
If you configure another text input method (Samsung keypad) you
must re-enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard. settings:
Even when SWYPE is enabled, you can still use both the physical • Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
and on-screen keyboard functionality. When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the
next word.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Locale
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
and text. sentence.
2. Tap Select input method ➔ Swype. • Show complete trace: sets the length of time the word trace line
remains on-screen as you swipe across the screen. Move the slider
between Shorter or Longer and tap OK.
Entering Text 70
• Word choice window: sets the amount of times the word choice Swype Text Entry Tips
selection window displays on screen. Move the slider between
Never or Always and tap OK. You can access the SwypeTips
application and watch a video
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to on-
or tutorial on using Swype. You
screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or
Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK. can also use the following
Swype text entry tips.
4. Locate the Help section to alter these settings:
• Create a squiggle (like an S
• Swype help: provides access to the on-line Swype Help shape) to create a double letter
information.
(such as pp in apple).
• Tutorial: a short tutorial that helps you to get started using Swype.
• Touch and hold a key to view the
5. Locate the About section to review the Swype application punctuation menu then make a
information: selection.
• Version: displays the current software version. • Move your finger or stylus over
the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
• Double-touch on the word you
want to change to correct a misspelled word, then touch the delete key
to erase one character. Touch and hold the delete key to erase an
entire word.
71
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype – 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common
punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates SYM.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
– SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. indicates 123ABC.
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the • SWYPE tips: Tapping this button displays the Swype tips and
following text mode options: tutorial screen.
123 Text input field
• 123 ABC ABC to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from
the onscreen keyboard.
• SYM (Symbol) SYM to enter symbols from the onscreen
keyboard.
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes to

and all letters that follow are in lower case.
Additional Current Mode
Swype Keyboard Overview Functions
• Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can
be entered. CAPS/ALT
key
• Additional Functions: provides additional message options.
• CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the Delete
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM
mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.
SWYPE Tips
• Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and
SYM. Text Input Voice actions
mode
Entering Text 72
Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE
All lowercase
In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few common
punctuation marks from the onscreen keyboard. The text mode Displays when the next character is entered in
key shows SYM . lowercase.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input Initial Uppercase
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Displays when the next character is entered as
uppercase but all subsequent characters are
Note: An on-screen landscape keyboard is not available since in this lowercase.
orientation you can use the QWERTY keyboard found below the screen.
All Uppercase
123
2. Tap ABC to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode Displays when all characters will be entered as
(showing letters and numbers on the onscreen keys). Once uppercase characters.
in this mode, the text input type shows SYM .

By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you
and all letters that follow are in lower case. lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the
word.
3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a To enter text via Swype:
word. This example shows a user entering the word “there”. Put your
– If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch finger down on the “t”, and without lifting, glide it to the “h”, and
and hold to erase an entire word. then to the “e”, and then over to the “r”, and back to the “e”.
When complete, lift your finger off the screen to allow the device
4. Tap SEND to send the message.
to determine the closest word match.
73
Using the Samsung Keypad
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen
popup appears to provide additional word choices. This on-screen keypad can be used to enter text while in a
portrait orientation.
Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE
Enabling Samsung Keypad
By using the onscreen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols
This device has a built-in on-screen QWERTY keypad that is
are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode
available in portrait mode. Using the QWERTY keypad/ keyboard,
using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from
you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters.
the onscreen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key
shows 123 . To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings
ABC
to default to the Samsung keypad.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Locale
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
and text ➔ Select input method ➔ Samsung keypad.
2. Tap SYM to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once
123 .
– or –
in this mode, the text input type shows ABC
From a screen where you can enter text, tap and hold the
3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want
text input field and tap Input method ➔ Samsung keypad.
to enter.
2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung
4. Touch and hold an on-screen key to enter the secondary
keypad configuration for all subsequent text input.
symbol (above the main one on the same key).
5. Tap to choose from additional symbols.
For example:
• To enter &: tap SYM and select the & key.
• To enter ~: tap SYM and select the & key.
Entering Text 74
Changing the Text Input Mode in Keypad 2. Tap ABC to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input in this mode, the text input type shows ?123 .
2. With Samsung keypad as your text entry method, select
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
one of the following text mode options:
• ABC ABC to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen 3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.
keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays ?123 . – If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch
• SYM (Symbol) ?123 to enter numbers by pressing the numbers and hold to erase an entire word.
selecting them on the onscreen keyboard. In this mode, the text 4. Tap SEND to send the message.
mode button displays ABC .
All lowercase
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the to toggle
capitalization.
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase.
Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keypad Initial Uppercase
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input Displays when the next character is entered as
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. uppercase but all subsequent characters are
lowercase.
Note: An on-screen landscape keyboard is not available since in this
orientation you can use the QWERTY keyboard found below the screen.
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the
cursor automatically advances to the next space.
75
Using Symbol Mode in Samsung Keypad • The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of
additional characters is active.
Use Symbol Mode to add numbers, symbols, or emoticons. While
Configuring Samsung Keypad Settings
in this mode, the text mode key displays ABC .
1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Locale and text
➔ Samsung keypad.
– or –
Important!: To use the Samsung keypad, the phone must be maintained in a From within an active text entry screen, tap from
portrait orientation. If you need to change the orientation of the the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad
screen to Landscape, we recommend using the QWERTY
keyboard beneath the screen. settings screen.
2. Tap ?123 to configure the keyboard for Symbol 2. Set any of the following options:
mode.Once in this mode, the text input type shows ABC . • Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration
(Qwerty Keypad [default] or 3x4 Keypad).
Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the
3. Tap ABC to return to ABC mode where the key shows available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.
?123 . • XT9 enables predictive text entry mode. This must be enabled to
gain access to the advanced settings. For more information, refer to
To enter symbols: “Using XT9 Predictive Text” on page 77.
1. Tap ?123 to enter ?123 mode. • XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9
features. For more information, refer to “Using XT9 Predictive
2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.
Text” on page 77.
– or – • Keypad sweeping automatically moves the screen in the direction
Tap 1/3 to select from additional symbol characters. your finger moves along the screen.
Entering Text 76
• Auto-capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the 3. Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the
first word in each sentence (standard English style). following advanced options:
• Voice input activates the Voice input feature. This is an
experimental feature that uses Google’s networked speech • Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to
recognition application. complete the word you have started. (A check mark indicates the
feature is enabled.)
• Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the space
bar twice. • Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered
before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,
• Tutorial launches a brief onscreen tutorial covering the main 4 letters, or 5 letters.
concepts related to the Samsung keypad.
• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical
Using XT9 Predictive Text errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby
characters. (A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing
the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards. • Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.
(A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
Note: XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected. XT9 advanced • Auto-append automatically adds predictions to the word you are
settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected. typing. (A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace
1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Locale and text misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A
➔ Samsung keypad. check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
2. Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation. • Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused
when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A check mark
indicates the feature is enabled.
• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list
after selecting the wrong word from the list.
77
• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9 text entry fields or other applications as easily as on your
dictionary. computer.
– Tap (Add word). To remove the battery cover:
– Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word. 1. Locate the cover release latch and place your fingernail in
– Tap Done to store the new word. the opening and firmly “pop” the cover off the device
• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding
(similar to a soda can).
words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example
youve becomes you’ve). 2. Remove the cover. For more information, refer to “Battery
– Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the Cover” on page 7.
current list of word substitutions.
– Press and tap Add. To open the device and access the keyboard:
– Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for 1. Turn the phone over to where the logo appears at the
example, youve). upper-right (1).
– Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for
example, you?fve). 2. Carefully grasp the base of the phone with both hands.
– Tap Done to save the substitution rule. 3. While holding onto both sides of the phone, use your
4. Press to return to the previous screen. thumbs to push against the bottom edge of the LCD (2).
Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard After the initial push, the LCD will then quickly slide away
Your phone has a full, slide-out QWERTY keyboard. The keyboard to reveal the QWERTY keyboard (3). For more information,
is located beneath the display screen and is accessed by sliding refer to “Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard” on page 12.
it open. This orients the phone's display to Landscape
(widescreen) mode. With the QWERTY keyboard, you can type
letters, numbers, punctuation, and other special characters into
Entering Text 78
To reveal additional QWERTY text editing options:
1. Touch and hold an active text entry field.
2. From the Edit text context menu, tap an available function:
• Select all highlights all characters in the text message field.
• Select text/Stop selecting text lets you manually highlight
characters in the text message field.
• Cut all cuts all characters in the current text message field.
• Copy copies selected characters in the current text message field.
• Copy all copies all characters in the current text message field.
• Paste inserts the previously cut or copied text into the message
field.
• Input method provides additional text input methods (Swype or
Samsung keypad). (When the QWERTY keyboard is open, Swype
and Samsung keypad are disabled.)
Using the QWERTY Keyboard
In this section we’ll cover the steps necessary to enter text using
the QWERTY keyboard. Using your phone's QWERTY keyboard is
just like using any standard computer keyboard. The following
keys perform special functions when entering text:
79
Entering Symbols and Smileys
Search: Displays the Quick Search box that can
Most symbols and punctuation marks appear as alternate
be used to search for a key term both on the
characters above the primary letters and numbers on the
phone or online. For more information, refer to
QWERTY keyboard. To access these symbols, press and
“Search Key” on page 29.
then press the appropriate key.
Alt: Allows you to use the alternate characters Emoticons (Smileys) are accessed by pressing and then
displayed at the top of the QWERTY keys.
selecting an image from the Emoticons page that is then inserted
Examples: -), +, @, #, etc..
at your current cursor position.
Shift: Changes the text input mode among
Upper/Lower/Mixed case mode. To enter symbols:
Space: Inserts an empty space. 1. Position the cursor where you want the symbol to appear
within your message.
Voice Search: Launches the Voice Search 2. Press and then press the key corresponding to the
function. For more information, refer to “Using symbol you want to insert.
Google Search” on page 29. • For example, to enter “ #1,” you would use the keyboard sequence
Emoticons: Launches the Emoticons page. shown below.
Scroll down and tap an entry from the extensive •
list of emoticons.
OK/Enter: Moves the insertion point to the next
line in a message.
Delete: Deletes the previous character, similar
to the backspace key on a computer keyboard.
Entering Text 80
To enter “smileys” (emoticons):
1. Position the cursor where you want the emoticon to appear
within your message.
2. Press to open the onscreen Emoticons page.
3. Scroll through the list and select a smiley by touching the
onscreen icon.
81
Section 6: Contacts
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List. 4. From the Manage
You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory. accounts area, tap
Accounts next to the account you
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to want to synchronize.
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you – or –
want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate Tap Add account to create
which account to synchronize with your Contacts list. a new account.
1. Sign in to your Google account. 5. Tap an account type to
2. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ add.
Accounts and sync. 6. Follow the on-screen
3. From the GENERAL SYNC SETTINGS section, touch one of instructions. The selected
the following options: account type
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the synchronizes with your Contacts list.
background.
• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.
Contacts 82
Contacts List • Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.
Creating a Contact
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters, contacts
The default storage location for stored on the phone can be lost.
saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s • SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card.
built-in memory.
Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.
If existing Google and Corporate Some SIM types can also store email information.
email accounts have been
synchronized to your phone, • T-Mobile Contacts Backup contacts are stored remotely on the
these will be made available to T-Mobile servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has
your device during the creation been damaged or reset.
of new entries. These new • Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can
Contacts entries can be also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail
assigned or saved to synced account.
accounts such as Phone, SIM, • Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook)
Google, or Corporate. contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either
Your phone automatically sorts an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft® Outlook®.
the Contacts entries alphabetically. You can create either a
Note: When storing an entry into your SIM card, note that only the Name and
Phone, SIM, T-Mobile Contacts Backup, Google, or Microsoft Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular
Exchange ActiveSync contact. contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that
Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.
Some SIM cards can store several emails.
Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings must be
set to Save new contacts to Phone.
83
Note: Contact information stored on the phone can be lost if the device is Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected
ever factory reset. destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google
destination type).
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts).
7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.
2. Tap (Add to Contacts) to add a contact.
• Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad
and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts ➔ Create contact. • Tap to enter an additional phone number
Continue with step 3.
• Tap to remove a previously entered phone number.
3. Tap a destination type (Phone, SIM, T-Mobile Contacts 8. Enter additional information such as: Email, Google Talk,
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync) Instant msg, GROUPS, RINGTONE, POSTAL ADDRESS,
(depending on where you want to save the new contact ORGANIZATION or MORE fields to input additional category
information). information.
• The More field contains the following options: NOTES, NICKNAME,
4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name WEBSITE, BIRTHDAY, and ANNIVERSARY.
for this contact using the displayed keypad. • Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields
5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact. and categories.
Selections are: Album, or Take photo. 9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field) To save a Number from your Keypad:
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home, Work, 1. From the Home screen, tap PHONE (Phone).
Work fax, Home fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback. 2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.
Contacts 84
3. Tap Add to Contacts ➔ Create contact or Update existing
Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text Input
(select the Contact entry from the on-screen list). Methods” on page 69.
– or –
Finding a Contact
Press and then tap Add to Contacts ➔ Create contact
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names
or Update existing (select the Contact entry from the on-
onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an
screen list). external location (such as Google, Exchange, or T-Mobile
• If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and Backup). They are all physically separate but are used as a single
proceed to step 5. entity, called Contacts.
4. Tap a destination type (Phone, SIM, T-Mobile Contacts Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange Active Sync). maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may
differ.
5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name
for this contact.
2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)
– or –
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home, Work,
Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry’s
Work fax, Home fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback.
name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process
Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected filters through all of your current account Contact entries to
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google only show you the matching entries.
destination type).
– or –
7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
85
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on Editing Contact Information
the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts).
the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts 2. Tap a contact name from the list.
list. Touch the contact entry.
3. Touch and hold the name entry and select Edit.
Note: You can also access an entry’s context menu by tapping an entry,
Tabs pressing and then selecting Edit.
Search
Create Contacts
Contact field 4. Edit the contact information then tap Save.
Tabbed
Navigation
Contacts
Context
Menu
Contacts 86
Adding a Number to an Existing Contact 4. Enter additional information such as: Email, Google Talk,
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts). Instant msg, RINGTONE, POSTAL ADDRESS, ORGANIZATION
2. Touch and hold an entry or MORE fields to input additional category information.
and select Edit to reveal • Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields
and categories.
the Contact entry’s
5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
details screen (page 89).
Deleting Contacts
3. Touch a phone number
field and enter a phone This option allows you to delete your contacts. You can delete all
your entries from your phone’s memory, your SIM card, FDN, or
number.
All.
• Tap on the
QWERTY keyboard to Important!: Once Contacts List entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.
remove a previously
entered phone number. 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts).
• Tap to enter an 2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select
additional phone number Contact Details Screen Delete ➔ OK.
• Tap to remove a Contact List Options
previously entered phone number. 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts).
2. Press . The following options display:
• Create contact: allows you to create a new Contact entry.
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
87
• Display options: You can choose to only display contacts that have Contact Menu Options
phone numbers, sort by first or last name, display contacts first
1. From the Home screen, tap
name first or last name first, display contacts stored to your SIM
card, display contacts stored on your phone, and/or display CONTACTS .
contacts stored to other accounts.
2. Touch and hold an entry to
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card
or microSD card. reveal the context menu.
• Get friends: allows you to get contacts from your friends on The following options
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also get contacts from display:
Corporate or Google accounts.
• Edit: allows you to edit the
• More: currently selected Contacts
– Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on entry.
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also add Corporate or Google • Delete: allows you to delete the
accounts. currently selected Contacts
– Speed dial: allows you to set up speed-dialing. entry.
– Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account. • Join contact: allows you to link
– Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message. the current contact to another current contact. Similar to a “see
– My profile: allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The information
also” feature. If you can’t remember a contact’s information, linking
will be the same that you can add for a new contact.
entries can help you find the person you are looking for.
– Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts, or view • Send contact information: allows you to send the current entry
your Own numbers, or Service numbers. info via text message.
• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to
the list within the Favorites tab.
• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts
entry from the Favorites tab.
Contacts 88
• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an Joining Contact Information
existing group.
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
• Mark as default: allows you to assign default numbers, email, etc.. networking logins, and other similar account information. For
for a selected Contact. For more information, refer to “Marking a
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
Contact as Default” on page 91.
corporate email account login because they are maintained
• Send namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s
separately and for different groups of people.
information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth, Email
(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Universal Composer. This device can synchronize with multiple accounts (such as
Contact Entry Options Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange Google, or
T-Mobile). When you synchronize your phone with those
1. From the Home screen, tap
accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the
CONTACTS . Contacts list.
2. Tap an entry to reveal the If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account
Contact entry’s Overview that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account
Screen. This screen contains under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat
Name, contact numbers, account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list
you can join all of her entries and view the information in one
email, and linked contact
record.
information.
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You
3. Press to reveal the can select any account email address or information all from one
context menu specific to this screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate
entry. the desired account information.
4. Tap an available option. Contact Overview Screen
89
Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any
Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both buy the
updates contacts make to email account names, email first contact’s name that is used.
addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list. For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second
entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see “Get Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.
Friends” on page 94.
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS . 5. Touch the main linked contact to view the contact
information you linked. The contacts and information
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another
displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate
entry).
what type of account information is contained in the entry.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account Unjoining a Contact
information.
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS .
3. Press and then tap Join contact. 2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link). want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.
The second contact is now linked with the first and the
account information is merged into one screen. Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account
information.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one 3. Tap the Joined contacts area.
record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.
4. Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin. The
contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer display
in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go back to
being separately displayed.
Contacts 90
Marking a Contact as Default Sending a Namecard
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to
messaging type applications, the application needs to know recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using
which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.
example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS .
phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the
“default” number or entry. 2. Tap a Contact entry.
The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to 3. Press and then tap Send via and select a delivery
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple method: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Universal Composer.
entries for the same person (see Linked contacts). The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS . is delivered when you send the message.
2. Tap a Contact entry.
Sending All Current Namecards
3. Press and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send
default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact all of your current entries at once.
name, phone number, or other contact information. 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS .
4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want 2. Press and then tap Import/Export ➔ Send namecard
to be the primary information (such as name, phone via.
number, or email) and select Save.
3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently
displayed Contact entries.
91
4. Tap Send and select a delivery method: Copying Contact Information
• Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth-compatible Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card
device.
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
• Email to attach the contact card to a new outgoing email (Exchange Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure
or Internet).
allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto
• Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet-based the SIM card.
email.
• Universal Composer to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Note: These must be contacts stored on the phone. External entries (Google,
text message. Exchange, etc...) can not be transferred in this manner.
Sending a namecard using Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS .
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a
recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on 2. From the Contacts List, press and then tap
page 83. Import/Export ➔ Export to SIM card.
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS . 3. Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries.
2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context – or –
menu. Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark
3. Tap Send namecard via ➔ Bluetooth. indicates a selection.
4. Tap Export. The name and phone number for the selected
Important!: You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.
contact is then copied to the SIM.
4. Touch the Bluetooth device in which to send this name
card. Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.
Contacts 92
Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card Synchronizing Contacts
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and
phone’s memory, onto the SIM card. manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS . accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current
2. From the Contacts List, press and then tap Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.
Import/Export ➔ Export to SD card.
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email
3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries. addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your
phone. For more information about syncing existing managed
accounts, see “Accounts and Synchronization” on page 203.
1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Accounts and
sync.
2. Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish
to synchronize.
3. Tap within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4. To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A check mark
indicates the feature is enabled.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If
after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.
93
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact • Choose contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on
information. category entries from within the locations such as: Phone, SIM,
T-Mobile Contacts Backup, Google, and Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync.
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and
Corporate accounts via the device. 3. Tap Done.
Get Friends
Display Options
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Get
whether to display contacts saved from the Phone, SIM, T-Mobile Friends option synchronizes the data from the selected account
Contacts Backup, external source, or all. You can also choose to type with your Contacts list.
display only contacts that have phone numbers.
2. Press and then tap Get friends ➔ Add account ➔
2. Press and then tap Display options. Configure any of
Add account.
the following options:
3. Determine which type of account information you want to
• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those
contacts containing phone numbers. synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:
• Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted: First Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,
name or Last name. Google, Facebook, Video Chat, Twitter, or T-Mobile Contacts
• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are Backup.
listed: First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first (Smith,
Steve). 4. Tap an account type to add.
5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type
synchronizes with your Contacts list.
Contacts 94
6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact 4. Tap Next and enter your Facebook account’s Email and
information. For more information, refer to “Joining Password information.
Contact Information” on page 89. 5. Tap Log in to begin the synchronization process.
To add Facebook content to your Contacts list: 6. Select a sync interval (None or Once a day) and tap Next.
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as 7. Tap those setting you wish to synchronize (all are enabled
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list.
by default). A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.
All of their current contact information is then migrated over to
your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly • Choose from: Select Contacts to Sync, Sync all contacts, or
Sync Calendar.
different name, separate entries are created and can later be
linked (joined) together into a single entry. 8. Tap Done to save these settings and return to Accounts and
sync screen.
Important!: This process not only synchronizes your contact information but
also your status, events, and more. 9. Tap CONTACTS to confirm your Facebook contacts are
now synchronized and appear in your Contacts list.
To resync Social Network Contacts:
2. From the Contact’s tab, press and then tap Get
friends ➔ Add account.
2. From the Contact’s tab, press and then tap Sync SNS
3. Tap Facebook from the Integrated contact accounts section
data.
of the Add an account screen.
• This process adds your Facebook account to the list of managed
and synchronized accounts. In this case, your Facebook contacts
are synchronized with your phone’s Contacts list.
95
My Profile Additional Contact Options
You can send this Virtual Business Card (V-card) to other contacts Sending an Email to a Contact
as an attachment. My Profile is the first Contact listed in the
Contacts list. Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can
use the Send email feature.
Note: As with any profile, your profile can be associated with a group.
To create My Profile: 2. Press and then tap More ➔ Send email. Contacts that
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts). contain an email address display.
2. Press and then tap More ➔ My profile. 3. Tap the contact to which you want to send an email. A
3. Enter information into the various fields. check mark displays next to the selection.
4. Tap Save to store the new entry.
Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen.
To edit My Profile:
1. With My profile displayed, press and then tap Edit. 4. Tap Add.
2. Modify any of the information contained in My Profile, then 5. Select an email account type.
touch Save. 6. Compose the email and tap Send.
Contacts 96
Export/Import Groups
For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call
page 92. group. This group can be one of the already present groups
Contact List Settings (Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.
From this menu you can determine the default storage location Creating a New Caller Group
for Contacts, display you phone’s primary number, and view 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS ➔ GROUPS tab.
service numbers listed in your Contact list. 2. Press and then tap Create group.
3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to
2. Press and then tap More ➔ Settings. enter a new group name. For more information, refer to
3. Select one of the following options: “Text Input Methods” on page 69.
• Save new contacts to: defines the default storage location of new 4. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.
Contacts. Choose from: Always ask, Phone, SIM, T-Mobile
Contacts Backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Selections are: Default ringtone, Sound, or Phone Ringtone.
• Own numbers: displays the number for this device. 5. Tap Save to store the newly created group
• Service numbers: displays the list of Service Dialing Numbers Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group
(SDN) assigned by your service provider. These numbers include
emergency numbers, customer service numbers and directory 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS ➔ GROUPS tab.
inquiries. 2. Tap a group entry ➔ (Add member).
3. From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want to
add. A checkmark displays next to contact entry.
4. Tap Add. The selected contacts are added to the group.
97
Removing an Entry From a Caller Group Sending a Message to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS ➔ GROUPS tab. 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS ➔ GROUPS tab.
2. Touch a group entry. 2. Tap an existing group,
3. Press and then tap Remove member. and press and then
tap Send message.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.
A checkmark displays next to contact entry. 3. Select the recipients of
the new message
5. Tap Remove.The contacts are removed from the group.
(indicated by a check
Editing a Caller Group
mark). If an entry
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part contains multiple phone
of the selected group.
numbers, each must be
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS ➔ GROUPS tab.
selected individually.
2. Touch a group entry.
4. Tap Send.
3. Press and then tap Edit group.
5. Type your message, and
4. Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields. tap Send.
For more information, refer to “Creating a New Caller
Group” on page 97.
5. Tap Save.
Contacts 98
The History Tab The Updates Tab
The HISTORY tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been From the UPDATES tab you can view updated contact information
received, missed, and returned. For more information, refer to that were synchronized with Facebook, Myspace, or Twitter.
“Call Logs Tab” on page 65. 1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts).
2. Tap the HISTORY tab. Note: You must log in to an SNS account (Facebook, Myspace or Twitter)
before you can view the Updates.
3. Press . The following options are available:
2. Tap the UPDATES tab. The updates display.
• Delete: allows you to delete calls or messages from History. Select
a call or message and tap Delete.
• View by: allows you to select the type of displayed calls, messages,
or emails. Selections are: Call, Message, Email, Facebook,
MySpace, Twitter, or Select all. Touch the items you want to display
then tap Done.
99
Section 7: Messages
This section describes how to send or receive different types of emoticons, audio, media and much more (page 101). To use this
messages. It also explains the features and functionality feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s
associated with messaging. message service.
Types of Messages The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
Your phone provides the following message types via the receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio
Universal Composer: messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
• Text Messages To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s multimedia message service.
• Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
• Email and Gmail Messages Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a
• Group Texting video clip to a text message changes the message from a text
message to a multimedia message.
• Google Talk
Message Icons on the Status Bar Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display indicate when messages are received and their type. For more
when new messages are received. For more information, refer to information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 24.
“Status Bar” on page 24. 1. From the Home screen, tap (Messaging) ➔ Create
Creating and Sending Messages via Universal new message.
Composer 2. Tap on the To field to manually enter a recipient or tap
The Universal Composer is a messaging feature that lets you to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid
send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones
entries must have a wireless phone number or email
or email addresses. This feature does much more than just send
and receive text, but incorporate other features such as address).
Messages 100
3. Tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Add. The • Attach other ( ): allows you insert the following: Audio clip,
contact displays in the recipient field. Record audio, Quick phrase, Calendar, Contacts, or Memo.
4. Tap the text field and use either the on-screen keypad or – Audio clip: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping OK.
QWERTY keyboard to enter a message. For more – Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record an
information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 69. audio clip using the phone’s microphone, then add it to your message
by tapping ➔ Add.
5. Add more recipients by tapping and select more
– Quick phrase: allows you to select from a list of preset text phrases
recipients. for insertion.
6. Review your message and tap SEND (Send). – Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event and add it
to your message.
Note: If you exit a message before you tap send the message automatically – Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry to
saves as a draft. add their contact info to your message.
– Memo: allows you to tap on an existing Memo and add it to your
Message Options message.
1. From the Home screen, tap (Messaging). • Emoticons ( ): provides a series of emoticon icons to choose
from for insertion into your current message.
2. From within a new or open message, tap one of the
• Insert Geotagging Information ( ): allows you to embed
onscreen icons to access message options such as:
information regarding your current location into your outgoing
• Social Media and Email Options ( ): includes email, message.
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, and Social Status Update Composer.
– or –
• Insert Image/Video ( ): allows you to choose an image of
From within a new message press to display
video from your Gallery to inert into your current message.
additional messaging options:
101
• Secret message: allows you to enter a password to lock this • More: displays additional message options such as: Secret
message and secure it from unsecured access. Recipient will need Message, Clear all stickies, Add subject, Add to contacts, View
to have the password to open the message. contact, or Add text.
• Add/Remove subject: inserts or deletes a Subject field in your Viewing Newly Received Messages
message.
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by
• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:
displaying within the Notification area at the top left of
Contacts, Calendar, and Memo.
your Home screen.
• Settings: provides access to additional Composer display options.
Activating these options provides access to features such as: Text To read a message:
message, Email, Facebook direct message, Twitter direct message,
MySpace direct message, Status Update. 1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For
– or – more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 27.
– or –
From within an open message press to display
additional messaging options: From the Home screen, tap (Messaging) then tap the
new message to view. The selected message displays on
• Call [recipient]: dials the senders number.
the screen.
• Delete: erases the current message.
• View stickies: allows you to view any sticky messages in the 2. Tap to play a multimedia message.
present message thread. 3. In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to
• Search: searches through the current message thread for a scroll through the message (if additional pages were
keyword.
added).
• Show attachment gallery: displays the any current images
attached within the message thread. Shows a gallery of all images
attached throughout the current thread.
Messages 102
Message Threads 4. Tap SEND to reply.
Sent and received text/picture messages are grouped into – or –
message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the Press and then tap Send after selecting one of these
messages exchanged between parties and displays a contact on
messaging options: Call [contact], Delete, View stickies,
the screen. Message threads are listed in the order in which they
were received, with the latest message displayed at the top. Search, Show Attachment Gallery, or More (Secret Message,
Clear all stickies, Add to contacts, Add subject, View
To reply to a text message: Current Recipient
My Text contact, or Add text).
tap (Messaging). To access message thread options:
2. Select the message and 䊳 From the main Text - All Messages screen, touch and hold
while open, tap the Enter the message to display the following options:
message here field and • Reply allows you to create a new bubble as a reply to the external
recipient.
then type your reply
• Delete thread: deletes the entire text message thread.
message.
• Add ##### to Contacts: adds the current caller to your Contacts
3. Compose your reply. list.
Your texts are colored • Block/Unblock contact: either prevents your phone from
dark Blue and your receiving text messages from the selected contact (name or
number) or allows the receipt of their new incoming messages.
caller’s reply’s are Light
Blue.
Reply Bubble
Function Options
103
To access additional Bubble options: Deleting multiple messages
䊳 Touch and hold the message bubble to display the 1. From the Home screen, tap (Messaging).
following options: 2. Press and then tap Delete.
• Delete: deletes the currently selected message bubble from the 3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark
thread.
displays beside each selected message.
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient. 4. Tap Delete.
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble 5. At the prompt, tap Yes to delete or No to end the process.
from the thread.
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a Message Search
single text message within the SIM card. You can search through your messages by using the Message
• View message details: displays details for the currently selected Search feature.
message bubble. 1. From the Home screen, tap .
Deleting Messages
2. Press and then tap Search.
Deleting a single message
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in
1. From the Home screen, tap (Messaging).
which to search, then tap .
2. From the ALL MESSAGES list, touch and hold a message,
4. All messages that contain the entered search string
then select Delete thread.
display.
3. At the prompt, tap Yes to delete or No to cancel.
Messages 104
Messaging Settings Multimedia message (MMS) settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia • Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages. you whether or not your message was delivered.
1. From the Home screen, tap . • Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a
request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.
2. Press and then tap Settings. • Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve
messages.
The following Messaging settings are available:
• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to
Storage settings
automatically retrieve while roaming.
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
reached, rather than overwriting them.
Restricted, or Warning.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
– Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content
messages are allowed in one conversation.
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many – Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are
multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation. creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content
Text message (SMS) settings Domain.
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs – Free: you may add any content to the message.
you whether or not your message was delivered. Notification settings
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the • Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
messages stored on the SIM card. status bar.
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your message • Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting notifications.
to deliver them.
• Reply path: allows you to set the reply path for each message you
send messages.
105
Common settings Group Texting
• Block list: allows you to configure a block list for incoming This service allows you to text a multiple number of contacts
messages from assigned parties. Similar to call blocking but for simultaneously.
incoming messages.
– Tap Select all to choose all recent recipients or place a checkmark Note: To receive certain group text messages, it might be necessary to
alongside those desired parties. disable the Notification pop-up feature. When enabled, notifications
are not displayed. For more information, refer to “Notification Pop-up”
– Tap Done to update the block list entries. on page 206.
Auto-Reply settings
Enables you to set up an “away from my phone” text message 1. From the Home screen, tap (Group Texting).
that goes out to all incoming recipients not on the block list. 2. Read the terms of service and tap Accept.
Similar to an “Out Of Office message” message for email.
3. Enter your first and last name and tap OK.
1. Tap Enable Auto-reply to activate the feature.
4. Click the on-screen photo icon to update your Group text
2. Edit the Start time & date and End time & date fields to
image and then tap OK. By clicking OK, you are publically
regulate when the feature is active.
sharing your name. Your phone is then provisioned for
3. Tap Auto-reply (Tap to edit) to create the new “away from group SMS texting.
my phone” outgoing text message.
To create a new group:
4. Tap OK to store the new message.
1. From the Home screen, tap (Group Texting).
2. Tap Create New Group to create a new text group.
Messages 106
3. Select entries from your 3. Tap Compose to open the text entry field and use either the
available Contacts to add on-screen keypad or QWERTY keyboard to enter a
members to your new message. For more information, refer to “Text Input
group. Methods” on page 69.
• Tap (Add Contact) 4. Review your message and tap (Send).
to manually add contacts by
Cloud Texting
entering a Name and
This feature enables you to text from the Web, your laptop, or
Phone Number. Tap OK to
tablet even if your no where near your phone.
store the new entry.
• Tap the Type to search
(Cloud Texting).
contacts field to search
through your current list of 2. Write down the cloud texting website.
available contact numbers. 3. Enter the Web address into your computer browser’s
4. Tap Save, enter a name for the new group, and then tap OK address bar and follow the onscreen instructions to:
to store the newly created group and its members. • Create an account
To send a new group text message: • Log in
1. From the Home screen, tap (Group Texting). • Create your Contacts
• Text your available contacts (as if you were doing it from your
2. Tap an available group from list within the Group Texting phone)
screen. This populates the To field with those members
from the currently selected group.
107
Email Creating an Internet Email Account
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
using several email services. You can also receive text message (Email). If you already have email accounts, your
alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email accounts screen is displayed
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts
simultaneously in one convenient location. 2. Enter you email address in the Email address field. The
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone will try to resolve
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and 3. Enter your password in the Password field, tap Next ➔
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (Corporate email or Outlook®). Next.
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet • Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to (POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private information specific to your email provider.
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account. • The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from
• IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently other email accounts accessed by your device.
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current 4. Tap Next at the Your accounts screen.
standard.
• POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs Note: The Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account type is used to configure
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer an Outlook/Corporate email account. For more information, refer to
“Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account” on page 111.
applications. POP3 is the current standard.
5. At the prompt name the account and enter a screen name
to identify yourself on this account. If you have already
setup this account, skip to step 6.
Messages 108
6. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You Composing Email
can also view Personal information for this account, 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts), (Email).
Travel information, and more (if available). 2. Press and then tap Accounts.
7. Tap Done to store the new account. 3. Select an email account.
4. Tap Inbox and press .
Important!: Only some “Plus” accounts include POP access allowing this
program to connect. If you are not able to sign in with your 5. Tap Compose.
correct email address and password, you may not have a paid
“Plus” account. Launch the Web browser to access your
account. 6. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.
• If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate
Opening an Email the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ recipients as you want.
7. Tap the Cc/Bcc field to carbon copy or blind copy
(Email).
recipients.
2. Press and then tap Accounts.
8. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
3. Select an email account and tap an email message.
9. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
Refreshing Email messages
• To add an attachment, tap (Attach) (from the bottom of the
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ screen) and make a selection.
(Email). 10. Once complete, tap SEND.
2. Select an email account.
3. Press and then tap Refresh.
109
Configuring Email Settings • Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is
received.
• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such
(Email).
as username, password, and IMAP server.
2. Press and then tap Accounts. • Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing settings, such as
3. Select an account. username, password, and SMTP server.
• Recent messages: Lets you assign the number of recent
4. From the email list screen, press and then tap More messages that are displayed on-screen. Choose from: 25 - Total.
➔ Account settings. • Forward with files: Lets you include attachments when forwarding
5. Alter any of the following settings: an email.
• Add signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display bottom of all outgoing emails.
name.
• Signature: Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing
• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your Gmail email messages.
outgoing email messages.
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
• Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time interval used by
your device to check your email account for new email messages. Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft
used for outgoing messages. Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and
within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange
mail (Gmail, etc..) is received. server.
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email
message is received.
Messages 110
Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 5. Enter a Domain, and confirm your Username, and Password
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ information and tap Next.
(Email). • If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Accept all SSL
certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this
2. If you already have other email account setup: additional level.
• Press and then tap Accounts.
Important!: If your exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field
• Press and then tap Add account. unchecked can prevent connection.
– or –
6. If prompted with a connection error, manually enter your
Enter your Email address and Password information, and Exchange server information within the appropriate field.
then tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.
further details and support. Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from
your company network administrator. Do not accept the default
• Email address: your Outlook work email address. entry as this is a guess based on returned information.
• Password: typically your network access password (case- 7. With the new server information entered, tap Next.
sensitive).
8. Read the on-screen activation disclaimer and, if prompted,
3. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new
tap OK.
email account screen).
9. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap
4. When prompted to provide additional detailed information,
Next.
scroll down the screen and tap Next.
10. Identify your new account with a unique name and provide
the outgoing name text then tap Done.
111
Opening an Exchange Email 5. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ • If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate
(Email). the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
2. Press and then tap Accounts. 6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email 7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
message.
• To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the
Refreshing Exchange Email screen) and make a selection.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ • Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK.
(Email). 8. Once complete, tap Send.
2. Select an exchange email account. Deleting an Exchange Email Message

䊳 Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select
3. Press and then tap Refresh.
Delete from the on-screen context menu.
Composing Exchange Email
– or –
With the email message displayed, press and then
(Email).
tap Delete.
2. Press and then tap Accounts.
3. Select an exchange email account.
4. Tap Inbox and press and then tap Compose.
Messages 112
Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings • Out of Office Settings assigns this account’s out of office settings.
1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Accounts and • Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email account’s
trash bin remotely.
sync.
• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.
2. Tap within the Microsoft Exchange account field to
• Email size configures the incoming email size allowed to pass
reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen. through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Larger
emails will have to be retrieved manually.
3. Toggle either the Sync Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to
• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon
force the device to manually resync either the exchange
when new email messages have been received.
Contacts or Calendar entries.
• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or
– or – upcoming event is pending.
Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings • Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is
pending.
you wish to synchronize:
• Incoming settings provides access to the Domain, password, and
• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the exchange server settings.
account. • Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and
• Your name displays the name used in the From field within your the remote exchange server.
outgoing email messages. • Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries
• Amount to synchronize to assign the sync range for your incoming between your phone and the remote exchange server.
and outgoing email messages between your phone and your • Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync
external exchange server. How many days worth of email calendar events.
messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from:
1 day, 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month. • Add signature activates the email signature feature.
• Default account assigns this account as the default used when • Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature
sending out new email messages. attached to new email messages sent from your phone.
113
4. Press to return to the previous page. 2. Tap an existing email message.
Using Google Mail Refreshing Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first 䊳 From within the Gmail message list, press and then
setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
synchronize your email with the Gmail account.
with your Gmail account.
Signing into Google Mail Composing a Gmail Message
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Gmail). (Gmail).
2. From the Gmail Inbox, press and then tap Compose.
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features
such as Google Mail and Android Market. 3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
2. Tap Next to add a Google account. Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.
3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account. 4. Press and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind
– or – copy.
Tap Sign in if you have a Google account.
5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
6. Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your
Opening Gmail message.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ 7. Once complete tap (Send).
(Gmail).
Messages 114
Viewing a Gmail Message Google Talk
1. From the Gmail Inbox, touch a message to view. The Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application for
following options are available: instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This
• Archive: archives the selected Email.
allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail
• Delete: deletes the Email.
accounts.
• <: displays older Emails.
• >: displays newer Emails.
(Talk).
2. Press to select one of the following additional
2. Tap Next to add a Google account.
options:
3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.
• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.
• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the – or –
star (just like clicking flags in Outlook). Tap Sign in if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads
• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages conversations and email.
display in boldface text in the Inbox.
• Go to Inbox: displays the Google Mail Inbox. 4. After entering your user name and password, tap the Down
• Mute: mutes the conversation. Navigation key.
• More: 5. Tap Sign in.
– Report spam: reports the Email message as spam. 6. Begin using Google Talk.
– Select text: allows you to select text to copy and paste.
– Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings. Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to
– Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help 5 minutes to complete.
information.
115
Section 8: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your 1. From the Home screen, tap (Camera).
phone, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
to manage your photos, images and sounds.
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You
can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in 3. If desired, before taking the photo, touch the left tab to
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG access various camera options and settings.
format. 4. You can also touch the screen to move the focus to the
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission. area you touch.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with 5. Press the Camera key until the shutter sounds. (The picture
another person’s privacy. is automatically stored within your designated storage
location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored
Using the Camera
on the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera and
Taking Photos
Camcorder Options” on page 117.
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the
camera key.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows

may appear on the photo.
Multimedia 116
2. Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in
1 8 various modes. Once you change the mode, the
2 corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Choose from Camera or Camcorder.
3
7
3. Shooting Mode: allows you to set the following options:
4 • Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before returning to the
shooting mode.
5 6
• Continuous: takes a succession of consecutive photos by pressing
and holding the Camera key.
Camera and Camcorder Options • Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and
then adding additional images to itself. The guide box lets you view
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall
Camera Options within.
4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or
The following short cuts are available for the camera:
saving pictures. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Touch the screen to display Book, New Email, or New Number.
the tab, then touch the tab to view these options.
5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on
1. Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or the subject through the lens sensor while taking a
rear camera lenses. picture.Touch and drag the slider to the left (to decrease
the value), to the right (to increase the value). You can also
touch the Minus icon (to decrease the value) or the Plus
icon (to increase the value).
117
6. Quick view: displays the photo for quick viewing. • Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects
to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,
7. Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera or Sepia.
mode. • Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters
8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camera (first tab) the light source: Centre weighted, Spot, or Matrix.
and General settings (second tab). • Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine,
Fine, or Normal.
Camera settings: • Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness
for this photo.
• Focus mode: sets the focus mode to: Auto focus or Macro (close
up photos). General settings:
• Scene mode: to select a camera setting for better image capture • Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly
under different lighting environments. Choose from: None (default), set up each shot.
Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, • Review: displays the photo for review. Selections are: On
Sunset, Dawn, Fall color, Firework, Text, Candlelight and Backlight. (checkmark) or Off (no checkmark).
• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camera takes the • Shutter sound: allows you to select a tone to play when the
photo. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off, camera’s shutter opens and closes. Sound selections are Sound 1,
2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the Sound 2, Sound 3, or Off.
camera takes the photo after the specified time elapses.
• Reset: resets the camera settings to the default settings.
• Resolution: sets the photo resolution to: 2048x1536, 2048x1232,
1600x1200, 1600x960, 640x480, or 800x480.
• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following
choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.
Multimedia 118
Camcorder Options 4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The saving videos. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone
following short cuts are available: Book, New Email, or New Number.
5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on
1 8 the subject through the lens sensor while recording a
video. Touch and drag the slider to the left to decrease the
2
value, or to the right to increase the value, or touch the
3 7 Minus icon to decrease the value, or the Plus icon to
4
increase the value.
6 6. Quick view: displays the video for quick viewing.

5
7. Camera button: records a video when pressed in
Camcorder mode.
1. Camcorder / Camera Mode: allows you to record a video
8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camcorder (first
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
tab) and General settings (second tab).
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Choose from Camcorder or Camera.
2. Recording mode: Normal or Limit for MMS.
3. Resolution: sets the video resolution to: 720x480,
640x480, 320x240, or 176x144.
119
Camcorder settings: Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options
• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camcorder records After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various
the video. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,
options.
2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the
camcorder records the video after the specified time elapses. Photo options
• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following • Share: allows you to share a picture using AllShare, Bluetooth,
choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent. Email, Facebook, Gmail, Picasa, Twitter, and Universal Composer.
• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects • Set as: sets the photo as a Home screen Wallpaper or Contact icon.
to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative, • More:
or Sepia.
– Send to: sends this photo to either: Recent log, Contacts, New Email
• Video quality: allows you to set the video quality to: Superfine, Fine, address, or New Phone number.
or Normal. – Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,
• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone number.
for this video. – Delete: deletes this photo.
General settings: Video options
• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly • Share: allows you to share a video using AllShare, Bluetooth, Email,
set up each recording. Gmail, Universal Composer, or YouTube.
• Audio recording: activates audio recording feature so you can • Play: plays the current video using the Video Player.
record audio while recording the video.
• More:
• Review: set to On to review the recorded video.
– Send to: sends this video to either: Recent log, Contacts, New Email
• Reset: resets the camcorder settings to the default settings. address, or New Phone number.
– Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,
Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone number.
– Delete: deletes this video.
Multimedia 120
Camera Gallery Options Camera Image Options
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Photo folder. You
images. can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the
1. From the Home screen, Photo folder.
tap APPS 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery). 2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the
Image viewer. Touch and drag a picture to the left to see
2. Select a folder location
the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture.
(ex: Camera) and select
3. Tap Slideshow to initiate an on-screen slideshow
an image by touching
displaying every image in the current folder.
and holding it once to
place a green check – or –
mark on the file. Tap Menu to display the following image menu options:
3. From this main Gallery • Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Twitter,
Bluetooth, Gmail, Universal Composer, Picasa, Facebook, and
screen to reveal gallery-
Email.
specific options Share,
• Delete: allows you to delete the current image.
Delete, and More.
121
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:
– Send to: allows you to send the file to either: Recent log, Contacts,
New Email address, or New Phone number.
– Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
after taking an image (Recent log, Contacts, New Email address or
New Phone number).
– Details: files details such as Title, Type, Date taken, Album, Location,
latitude, Longitude, etc..
– Set as: allows you to assign a picture to one of three location: Home
screen Wallpaper or to a Contact’s icon image.
– Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current
picture. Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or
Discard to ignore any changes.
– Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
counterclockwise direction.
– Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
clockwise direction.
Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon
(Gallery).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the
Image viewer.
3. With the image displayed, tap Menu ➔ More ➔ Set as ➔
Contact icon.
Multimedia 122
4. Tap a contact to make a selection. 6. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image.
5. Crop the image and tap Save. – or –
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ Using the Camcorder
(Gallery). In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high
definition videos.
Image viewer.
3. With the image displayed, tap Menu ➔ More ➔ Set as. Note: To ensure the Camcorder can record the video, use an SDHC memory
card.
4. Select the available option:
• Home screen Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home Shooting Video
screen background. This image is spread across all available
screens. Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture. having the light source behind you.
Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out
to create a cropped area. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Camera) ➔ Camcorder to activate the camcorder
mode.
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.
123
3. Press the record video key ( ) to begin shooting video. 2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video
4. Touch to pause the recording or touch to stop the playback.
recording and save the video file to your Photo folder. – or –
5. Once the file is saved, tap Play to play your video for Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to
review. select the video (green check mark) and display the
following video menu context options:
6. Press to return to the viewer.
Camcorder Options • Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Universal
Composer, YouTube, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email.
Camcorder options are represented by icons across both sides of • Delete: allows you to delete chosen/selected pictures. Touch the
the screen. checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to
For more information, refer to “Camera and Camcorder Options” delete, then touch Delete.
on page 117. • More: provides you with the additional options such as:
Accessing Videos – Send to: allows you to send the file to either: Recent log, Contacts,
New Email address, or New Phone number.
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder. – Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in after shooting video (Recent log, Contacts, New Email address or
the Camera folder. New Phone number).
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ – Details: displays video file information.
(Gallery).
Multimedia 124
Amazon MP3 Opening and Navigating within Files
Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the
Amazon.com. Using Amazon MP3 you can download DRM-Free device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.
(digital rights management) MP3 formatted songs and albums. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ (Files).
(Amazon MP3).
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your
2. Tap one of the categories to begin browsing the selected file.
music files. • Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to download music. • Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory.
• Press and then tap View by to change the way the files are
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please displayed on-screen. Choose from: List, List and details, or
contact your service provider for further details.
Thumbnail.
Files • Press for these additional options: Share, Create folder,
Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos, Delete, View by, List by, and More (Move, Copy, Rename,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one Bluetooth visibility and Settings).
convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if 3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to
the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4).
launch the associated application.
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Files).
Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,

subfolders, etc.
125
The Gallery Using the Media Room
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For The Media Room application plays video files, local music stored on
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a the SD card, as well as streaming media via Slacker. Slacker offers
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as free, internet radio for mobile phones.
a picture message. Playing Videos
Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the (Media Room). A list of videos sorted on the SD card
folders, and then open the Gallery.
displays in the Video list.
Opening the Gallery 2. Tap the VIDEO and tap a video file to begin viewing.
Playing Music
(Gallery). For more information, refer to “Camera
Gallery Options” on page 121.
(Media Room). Music player tips display.
Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card, 2. Tap the MUSIC tab and select a music category: Playlists,
Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album
contains all the pictures in the storage card. Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, or Rated.
3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is
connected through the earphone port only.
Multimedia 126
Using Slacker Radio songs play in order and are not shuffled.
(Media Room). Music Player Options
2. Tap the SLACKER tab and select a radio station category: The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
Favorites, Recently Played, Custom Stations, Slacker the music player such as whether you want the music to play in
Spotlight, Top Stations, or Slacker Stations. the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
3. Scroll through the on-screen list and tap an entry to begin
䊳 With the music player application displayed, press
playback.
and select one of the following options:
4. The following Music Player controls are available:
• Add to playlist: adds the selected music file to a quick playlist.
Pause the song. • Share: shares a music file via AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or
Start the song after pausing. Universal Composer.
• Media Share: shares a current song to other devices via AllShare.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
• Add as ringtone: sets this song as a Phone ringtone.
previous song.
• Media Home: takes you back to the main Media Home screen.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go
Using Playlists
to next song.
Plays the entire song list once. Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.
These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this
1 Repeats the currently playing song. device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows
ALL Replays the current list when the list ends. Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted
into the device.
shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
127
Creating a Playlist Removing Music from a Playlist
(Media Room). Music player tips display. (Media Room). Music player tips display.
2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists. 2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists.
3. Press ➔ Add a playlist. 3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4. Select from your available songs. 4. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context
5. Tap Add ➔ Create new playlist. menu.
6. Enter a new playlist title, then tap Save. 5. Tap Remove from playlist.
Adding Music to a Playlist Editing a Playlist

1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can
(Media Room). Music player tips display. also share, delete, or rename the playlist.
Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default
2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists ➔ Add to playlist.
playlists can not be renamed.
3. Tap the song and tap Add. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Media Room). Music player tips display.
Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name
from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist. 2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists.
4. Select the existing playlist or tap Create new playlist. 3. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
4. Tap Rename.
Multimedia 128
5. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save. Media Hub
Transferring Music Files Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and
TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two
family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your
methods:
favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the
1. Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market. stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media
Music files are directly stored on your phone. Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection. experienced it before.
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.
For more information, refer to “USB Settings” on page 201.
Removing Music Files Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi connection to preview and
download a media file.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ You must have a microSD card installed prior to initiating the
(Media Room). Music player tips display. service. This card acts as a storage location for your downloaded
rental or purchase.
2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Songs.
3. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen Important!: Before using this service, you must be connected to an active
Wi-Fi connection.
context menu.
4. Tap Delete ➔ Delete. The music file(s) is deleted.
129
Creating a New Media Hub Account • What’s new: shows recently added media that is available for rent
or purchase.
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information. • My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have
purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.
• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or
(MediaHub). purchase. Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the
screen. Touch a category and movies of that type display.
2. Press and tap My Account.
• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll
3. Tap Create Account and enter the required information. through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch a
4. Accept the Terms and Conditions by placing a checkmark category and TV shows of that type display.
4. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you
in the adjacent field.
would like to purchase or rent.
5. Tap Create Account.
5. Tap WATCH PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent
6. From the My Account screen, you can edit parameters
or Own.
such as: My Details, My Purchases, My Payment Methods,
Manage My Devices, Logout, or Reset Media Hub. 6. Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen
instructions. The media stores to the My Media folder.
Using Media Hub
Media Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you
(MediaHub).
create an account in Media Hub.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap • Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up
Accept to continue or Decline to exit. to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same
account.
3. At the Media Hub screen select one of the following
options:
Multimedia 130
• You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than • In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of
once every 30 days. more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d
the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing
rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,
like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content
later point in time subject to content re-download availability and may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive
studio permissions. hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond
• You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have the thirty (30) day rental window).
acquired through the Service. • You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
• You must have Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content. through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be T-Mobile TV
viewable on only 1 device in your account. T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and
• Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card. Video on Demand. This service can incur additional charges,
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks please contact your customer service representative or visit us
where there is a weak signal. on the Web
• You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media Note: If you are unable to attain a connection to this service, it is
recommended you turn off your Wi-Fi connection.
Content has been buffered.
• You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive
hours of start of playback.
(T-Mobile TV). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions
• Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time. page displays.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
contact your service provider for further details.
131
2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or YouTube
touch Exit. YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi
connections must be disabled. (YouTube).
3. Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi 2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or
connection. touch Decline.
4. Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30-day trial of the service. 3. When the screen loads you can begin searching and
viewing posted videos.
5. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing:
Live TV, On Demand, My Media, More Info, Browse, or Live 4. Press ➔ Settings ➔ High quality on mobile if you
Channels. prefer high quality output.
Multimedia 132
Section 9: Applications and Development
This section outlines the various applications that are available on Accounts and Sync
your phone. This application allows you to configure general synchronization
Applications settings that determine whether the background data is
synchronized, and whether you automatically synchronize data
The Applications list provides quick access to all the available
with the phone.
applications on the phone.
Refer to the application table on page 37 for a description of each
(Accounts & Sync).
Application, its function, and how to navigate through that
particular application. If the application is already described in For more information, refer to “Accounts and Synchronization”
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to on page 203.
that particular section is provided. Alarm & Clocks
Here you can set an alarm, configure and view the World clock,
use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The applications display in a
tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger.
For more information, refer to “Alarm and Clocks” on page 178.
(Alarm & Clocks).
133
AllShare • Play file from server on my phone allows you to receive and
playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile your device.
phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on
• Play file from server on another player via my phone allows you
who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen
to “piggy-back” content playback on an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver.
monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy. Your phone retrieves content from an external wireless source (eg.,
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other server) and pushes it through to an external wireless destination
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network (eg., TV). The phone acts to both route the media and control its
playback (as a remote).
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-
compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital Configuring AllShare Settings
multimedia streamer. The AllShare™ application must first be configured prior to its
initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-FI,
Important!: You must activate Wi-Fi to use this application. For more Items to share, source server address, and external device
information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 181.
acceptance rights.
(AllShare). (AllShare).
2. Follow the on-screen prompts. 2. Tap Settings and configure the following settings as
desired:
The application contains three separate streaming media
options: • Media server name allows you to enter the name of the server
• Play file from my phone on another player allows you to play transmitting the media files. ex., MyServer. Once you enter the
local device content on a Wi-Fi capable TV or playback device. The name tap Save.
phone can then be used as a remote to control playback. • Share media allows you to configure which media types will be
shared. Choose from Share video, Share audio, or Share picture.
Applications and Development 134

• Access point network allows you to turn on your Wi-Fi Receiving Media via AllShare
functionality and connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.
• Upload from other devices allows you to setup an acceptance rule
(AllShare).
of incoming media from other external devices. Choose from
Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK. 2. Tap adjacent to Play file from server on my phone.
3. Press to return to the previous page. (This procedure assumes selection of the second option.)
Transmitting Media via AllShare 3. Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If you
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ server does not appear, tap Refresh.
(AllShare). Playing Files from a Server to Another device via the Phone
2. Tap adjacent to Play file from phone on another player 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
via my phone. (This procedure assumes selection of the (AllShare).
first option). 2. Tap adjacent to the Play file from server on another
3. If transmitting local media to an external device, scroll player via my phone. (This procedure uses the phone as a
through your microSD card folders to locate the file(s) you bridge between your server and another AllShare-capable
wish to transmit. A check mark indicates the file has been device).
selected. 3. Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If your
4. Tap Add to playlist. Your phone then begins to search for source does not appear, tap Refresh.
compatible Wi-Fi devices. 4. Search for the media files you wish to add to a playlist.
5. Tap a destination device from the on-screen list. If you Once the files are selected, tap Add to playlist. Complete
desired device does not appear, tap Refresh. this step for all media (Videos, Audio, Pictures).
135
5. Select an available device on which to play the selected AppPack
media files. Installs the T-Mobile AppPack that allows you to discover those
6. Follow the remaining on-screen instructions. applications that are compatible specifically with your phone.
Amazon MP3
(AppPack).
Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by
Amazon.com. Using you can download DRM-Free (digital rights 2. Read the terms and conditions and tap OK.
management) MP3 formatted songs and albums. For more 3. Activate your currently bundle software by tapping an
information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on page 125.
on-screen selection.
– or –
(Amazon MP3).
Tap Manage Applications to be taken to the All tab within
2. Select an on-screen category (Bestselling Albums, the Manage Applications menu. For more information,
Bestselling Songs, Browse By Genre, or Search). refer to “Managing Applications” on page 199.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to locate the desired
track or album.
4. Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview. Tap the
song title again to stop playback.
• Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the selected song.
5. Once you have located a desired song title or album, tap
[price] ➔ Buy.
• Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song and download it to
your device’s microSD card.
Calculator Calendar
Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a
subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and
a scientific calculator. synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ and your online Google account.
(Calculator).
Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys. Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
Plus, Minus, Multiplication, or Division key. S M T W T F
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12 (Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:
14 15 16 17 18 19
4. Enter the next number. • Month: displays the Month view.

5. To view the result, tap the = (equals) key. • Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.
• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,
or Day, or you can look for events for a future date.
Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode (sliding screen open) to reveal
additional scientific functions.
137
2. Press and select one of the following options: 4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of
•Search: allows you to search within current events. calendar events between your device and the remote
•Create: creates a new Event. exchange server. A check mark indicates the feature is
•Go to: displays a specific date. enabled.
•Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting Call logs
the date.
The Call log lists all the calls missed, received, or dialed.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or
an individual event. For more information, refer to “Call Logs Tab” on page 65.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings. Contacts
For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” on The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
page 93. Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
To manually sync calendar events: For more information, refer to “Contacts List” on page 83.
1. Press ➔ and then tap ➔ Accounts and
sync.
2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to
synchronize.

Camera DriveSmart
Use your 3.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions from
format. your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to voicemail and
customizing auto responses to both callers and text message
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store respondents notifying them that your driving.
photos.
Warning!: Using your mobile device while driving may divert your attention
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ from your responsibilities as a driver, result in an accident or other
injury and could be a violation of law.
(Camera).
For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 116. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
Cloud Texting DRIVE
SMART (DriveSmart)
The term "cloud" refers to the idea that there is no hardware or 2. Tap OK and begin configuring the on-screen application
software required for this function and that the operation of your options:
texting program is web-based.
• Upgrade to DriveSmart Plus allows you to upgrade the phone’s
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ standard version to a more robust version of the application.
(Cloud Texting). • DriveSmart enables or disables the DriveSmart application.
For more information, refer to “Cloud Texting” on page 107. • Enable Bluetooth activates Bluetooth and routes all incoming calls
to your handsfree device.
• Enable Auto Response enables or disable an automatic SMS text
message response to all incoming text messages notifying users
that you are currently driving and can not answer a text.
• Edit Auto Response allows you to edit the default text message
response or create your own. After editing the response tap OK.
139
3. Press to return to the previous screen. Files
Email Organize and store data, images, and more in your own personal
file folders. Files are stored to the memory card in separate (user
Email enables you to review and create email using most email
defined) folders.
services. The device alerts you when you receive an email
message. 䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ (Files).
(Email). For more information, refer to “Files” on page 125.
For more information, refer to “Email” on page 108. Gallery
Facebook The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
Facebook is a social network service and website that allows
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as
users to create a personal profiles, add other users as friends
a picture message.
and exchange messages, including automatic notifications when
they update their profile. 䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ (Gallery).
(Facebook). For more information, refer to “The Gallery” on page 126.
For more information, refer to “Get Friends” on page 94. Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize
with your Gmail account on the web.
For more information, refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 114.

Google Search Highlight
Google Search is a web-based search engine that uses This downloadable application/widget allows you to stay up to
text-based queries to search for content on web pages. date on relevant news, Android Market apps and games (specific
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ to your phone), T-Mobile ringtones, CallerTunes and more.
(Google Search) and enter the search text. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
– or – (Highlight).
Touch the microphone on the Google Search bar and say 2. Accept the terms and conditions and tap Accept.
the search information. For more information, refer to 3. Select your desired channels/stations (sources of
“Search Key” on page 29. For more information, refer to information) from the list and tap Done.
“Using Google Search” on page 29. 4. The application then displays information corresponding to
Group Texting the channel categories you selected.
This service allows you to text a multiple number of contacts To adjust the Highlight settings:
simultaneously. 1. Press and then tap Settings.
2. Enable options within these stations/channels.
(Group Texting).
3. Press to exit the application.
For more information, refer to “Group Texting” on page 106.
141
Latitude 4. Tap the Edit privacy settings field, then tap a location
Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and reporting option:
status messages with each other. It also lets you send instant • Detect your location to enable the Location feature.
messages and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to You are now set up and ready to use Latitude.
your friends’ locations. • Set your location to manually set your location on a map.
• Hide your location to conceal your location from your friends.
Important!: You must sign in to your Google account, and enable the Location
feature before you can use this application. For more 5. From the main Latitude application screen, press and
information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 181.
then tap an available application option such as: See map,
Privacy, or List view.
Note: It is best to enable Wi-Fi only after the application has launched.
Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view
(Latitude). real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions.
2. Tap Wi-Fi Disabled - Click to enable connection to navigate There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of
interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector
to the Wi-Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi-Fi if it
or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level.
is not already enabled. For more information, refer to “Wi-
Fi” on page 172. Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G) or
connection. The Maps application does not cover every country
3. If desired, tap Send location to others to share your current or city.
location with your Google friends and contacts.

(Maps).

Enabling a Location source Opening Maps
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable (Maps).
the location source you must enable the wireless network, or
2. Locate the top row of the applications to access additional
enable the GPS satellites.
options:
Important!: The more location determining functions are enabled, the more • Search Maps: allows you to search for a place of interest.
accurate the determination will be of your position.
• Places: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ locate a business or person, find out more information about a
business, see coupons, public responses, and more (ppage 153).
Location and security. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Coffee, Bars,
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or Add your own place.)
A list of places within this category displays.
location based on nearby cell towers. Tap Agree.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:
3. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite. – Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are
4. Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how
fast the traffic is moving.
power using sensors. Tap OK. – Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite
images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery
Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites. available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.
Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the
street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses – Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the
more battery power. current map location.
– Buzz: allows you post public messages and photos at a location for
everyone to see.
– Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your
location with them.
143
– More Layers: allows you to add additional layers such as My Maps, – About: displays general information about Google maps such as
Wikipedia, Transit Lines, Watch the World Cup, and Favorite places. Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free
• My Location: when touched, the location displays on the map with memory, etc.
a blinking blue dot. Market
3. Press and select one of the following options: Android Market provides access to downloadable applications
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest. and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or
starting point. flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
• Starred Places: marks favorite locations on the map. These items Accessing the Market
are automatically synchronized with maps. 1. From the Home screen, tap (Applications) ➔
APPS
• Clear Map: after viewing or following directions, this option resets
(Market).
the map.
• Join Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status 2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next.
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages 3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account information.
and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’
locations. 4. Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of
• More: service.
– Labs: a testing ground for experimental features that are not ready to
For more information, refer to “Downloading a New Google
use publically.
Application” on page 145.
– Help: uses the browser to display a searchable Google Mobile Help
screen.
– Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy
Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from
the pop-up menu.

Downloading a New Google Application 4. Tap Install.
To download a new application, you will need to use your Google
account to sign in to Android Market. The Android Market home Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal
data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times.
page provides several ways to find applications. The home page
features applications and includes a list of item applications by 5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for
category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My
the application.
downloads.
6. Check the progress of the current download by opening
Note: If you can not establish a connection with the Android Market, the Notifications panel.
disconnect your active Wi-Fi connection and try to reconnect.
7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone,
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ the content download icon appears in the
(Market). notification area of the status bar.
2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're 8. On the Android Market screen, tap Downloads, tap the
interested in, and tap the name. installed application in the list, and then tap Open.
3. Read the application descriptions.
Tip: The newly downloaded application displays on the Home screen or other
selected panel.
Important!: If the selected application requires access to data or control of a
function on your phone, Market displays the information the
application will access.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
Touch OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once contact your service provider for further details.
you touch OK on this screen you are responsible for using this
application on the phone and the amount of data it uses. Use this
feature with caution.
145
Launching an Installed Google Application Manage applications
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications). This feature allows you to manage and remove installed
2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is applications. You can also view the amount of memory or
resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources
typically located on the last Applications page.
for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data,
Android Development cache, or defaults.
This device can be used for Android application development. 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this Applications ➔ Manage application.
device, then run the applications using the hardware, system,
Clearing application cache and data
and network.
Warning!: Android Dev Phone 1 devices are not intended for non-developer Applications ➔ Manage applications.
end-users. Because the device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other 2. Tap an application you for which you want to clear the
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
cache or data.
Unknown sources 3. Tap Clear data or Clear cache.
This feature can be used for Android application development. Uninstalling third-party applications
The feature allows developers to install non-Market applications.
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed
from Android Market.
Applications ➔ Unknown sources.
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
active.
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the Application
info screen, tap Uninstall.
Media Hub For more information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 69.
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV Memo options
content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch 1. While viewing the list of Memos, press and select
from the convenience of anywhere.
one of the following options:
• Create: allows you to create a memo.
(Media Hub).
• Maximize: remove the bent, lower-right corner of the memo page
For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 129. and to maximize the information display.
Media Room • Delete: allows you to delete one or more memos.
The Media Room application plays video files, local music stored on • Search: allows you to search within the current set of memos.
the SD card, as well as streaming media via Slacker. • View by: allows you to sort the view of the available memos by
either All or To-do Only.
2. Touch and hold the memo then select Send via and choose
(Media Room).
the method to send this memo: Bluetooth, Email, or
For more information, refer to “Using the Media Room” on page 126. Universal Composer.
Memo
3. From the memo list, touch the upper-left edit button and
This feature allows you to create a memo. select a color for the memo’s background, then tap Save.
(Memo).
2. Tap Create memo.
3. Compose the memo.
4. Press and select a color and tap Save.
147
Messaging 4. Tap the Tap to create memo area of the screen and enter
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service text then tap Save.
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other 5. Tap the No weather data icon in the upper, left corner (over
mobile phones.
the photo) and select a weather condition from the list to
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create describe the weather conditions for this entry.
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile
phones. 6. Tap Save.
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ Mini Diary settings
(Messaging). 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
For more information, refer to “Messages” on page 100. (Mini Diary).
Mini Diary 2. From the main Diary listings page, press ➔ Settings.
This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can 3. Tap Selected city and tap the city for which you are
add a photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable documenting this entry.
life event.
4. Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically
update.
(Mini Diary). Any diary entries display in a list.
2. Tap a color template square and tap Save. This selects the Deleting a Mini Diary entry
new color template. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
.
3. Tap Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary
event and touch the source. Selections are: Camera, or 2. Press ➔ Delete all.
Images.

Mini Diary options My Account
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ This option provides you with account specific information such
. as your current activity, billing information, Plan Services
information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,
2. Select a diary.
payment reminder, or power saver.
3. Press and select one of the following options:
Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the
• Create: creates a new diary entry. latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.
• Delete: deletes the displayed entry.
• Publish: charges may apply when publishing (exporting). Touch Yes The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
then select Facebook or MySpace. • My Account: check usage, pay your T-Mobile bill.
• Send via MMS: attaches this entry and sends it as a multimedia • My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage
message. & Battery.
• Change photo: replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to
take another photo or use another image. Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.
• Delete photo: deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes
to confirm.
(My Account).
2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Set Alerts, Billing,
and Plan.
149
Activity Plan Services
The Activity tab displays your current minute and message The Plan screen displays specific information and charges for
activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as your current plan and services. The screen also displays
well as the number of messages used for a particular start date. additional services information and charges.
Set Alerts My Device
From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view
following: support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or
• Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.
in your plan. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
– Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of minutes (My Device).
used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the plan.
– Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s total 2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
available minutes.
• Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and Tip: Use the Menu key ( ) to toggle between My Account and My Device.
remaining in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this
setting does not apply. The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• Data Usage: helps you keep track of your data usage. • My Account: check usage, pay your T-Mobile bill.
• Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due. • My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage
& Battery.
• Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30
percent efficiency. The alert displays in the notification window. This The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,
alert is automatically set to On. Support, and Storage & Battery.
Billing
This provides a billing summary.

Personalize My Device Navigation
Using this menu you can personalize Ringtones and Wallpapers. Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected
• Ringtones: you can personalize your phone’s ringtones when you turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.
Download HiFi Ringers, view Ringtone Subscriptions, access Voice
Sounds, and access Phone Ringtones. Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,
dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
• Wallpapers: you can personalize your phone’s background by
selecting wallpapers from the T-Mobile store, Gallery, Live
Wallpaper, or the Wallpaper Gallery. Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
Quick Tools following conditions:
- inside a building or between buildings
Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to view and configure - in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
the following features and parameters: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data - around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
Roaming, GPS, Brightness, Screen Timeout, and Phone Info. - in a vehicle with tinted windows
Support 䊳 From the Home screen, tap (Applications) ➔

APPS
Displays support information My Account Feedback, T-Mobile (Navigation).
Forums, and T-Mobile on Twitter.
Enabling GPS Location
Storage & Battery
From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the
Location and security
phone or memory card. You can also view the battery level
percentage and other information. 2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A check mark indicates the GPS
location feature is enabled.
151
Navigation options Navigation Map options
Note: If prompted to download a Speechsynthesis Data installer application,
(Navigation). follow the on-screen instructions to complete this installation.
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept. If prompted to install a Voice Guidance application, follow the
on-screen instructions to complete this installation.
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:
• Driving/Walking: configures the method of travel. Selection of Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:
Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and • Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.
obstructions. • Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing
– Driving mode enables the Settings feature: allows you to configure (English only).
your Route options such as: Avoid highways or Avoid tolls.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:
• Maps: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.
• Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic
• Speak Destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color
to search for matching locations in your area. represents how fast the traffic is moving.
• Type Destination: allows you to manually enter a destination • Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.
address (via the on-screen keypad). Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best
• Contacts: allows you to receive turn-by-turn directions to the imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three
address stored for a selected Contacts entry. years old.
• Starred Places: allows you to obtain directions to locations that • Parking: displays parking information relative to your current
have been starred within Google maps (maps.google.com). location.
• Gas Stations: displays gas station location relative to your current
location.
• ATMs & Banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your
current location.

• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to Places
your current location.
Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google
Press to access these additional features: Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business
• Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of or person, find out more information about the business, see
business, or even a type of business. coupons, public responses, and more.
• Set Destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where 1. From the Home screen, tap (Applications) ➔
APPS
you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting
(Places).
from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description. 2. Use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place
• Mute: allows you to mute the audio readout and directional or choose from among the various categories. Matches are
information. filtered by those closest to your current location.
• Exit Navigation: terminates the application.
3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,
• More: provides additional application information such as: Help and
Coffee, Bars, Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or
Term, Privacy & Notices.
Add your own place.) A list of places within this category
Caution!: Navigation is a beta product. Use caution. displays.
4. Tap the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related maps
feature.
5. Press and then tap either Starred places or My Maps.
The My Maps function of this application are similar to
those of the Google Maps application, but work along with
the Latitude service where you can share your location
with your chosen Google friends.
153
Settings • Connectivity: change your Internet and Google Location Service
settings.
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, 3. Follow the onscreen configuration instructions.
and any extra settings associated with your phone. – or –
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ Tap Home to return to the main home screen.
(Settings).
T-Mobile Mall
– or –
This downloadable application provides access to several phone
Press ➔ and then tap (Settings). features and tunes.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
page 181. (T-Mobile Mall).
Setup Wizard 2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap I agree.
Helps you quickly setup various phone options such as Accounts, 3. Read the consecutive legal disclaimer screen and tap Yes
Themes, Multi-tasking, and Connectivity.
or No to agree/disagree to its terms.
4. Tap OK to complete the activation process.
(Setup Wizard).
5. Review the on-screen options such as:
2. Tap an on-screen option to begin configuration:
• Recommendations
• Accounts: setup your email and social network accounts
• Song recommendations
• Themes: select from multiple phone themes. For more information,
refer to “Theme Changer” on page 156. • Ringtones
• CallerTunes
• Jump Key Settings: configure your favorite applications so that you
can access them from anywhere. • Applications
• Games
T-Mobile TV Task Manager
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time, and the
Video on Demand. biggest reason for this are background applications. These are
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still
active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which
(T-Mobile TV).
of these applications are still active in the background but also easily
For more information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 131. lets you choose which applications are left running and which are
Talk closed.
You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk allows Shutting Down Applications
you to communicate with other people who are also connected 䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
with Google Talk on the phone or on the web. (Task Manager). This screen contains the following
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ tabs:
(Google Talk). • ACTIVE display those currently active applications running on your
For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 115. phone.
• PACKAGE displays any installed packages or applications from the
Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove
them from your phone.
• RAM, displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear memory.
• SUMMARY displays a visual graph indicating the available and
used space within the INTERNAL PHONE STORAGE storage
location and EXTERNAL SD CARD.
• HELP provides additional battery saving techniques.
155
6. From the ACTIVE tab, tap Exit to close selected applications 3. Select an onscreen theme by locating it on the center of
or tap Exit all to close all background running applications. the screen and tapping it.
TeleNav GPS Navigator ThinkFree Office
TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
visual directions for GPS navigation. compatible office suite. This application provides a central place
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ for managing your documents online or offline.
(TeleNav GPS Navigator). The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
2. A Warning message displays. Read the agreement and tap
Accept to accept the terms, or tap Exit to close the window.
(ThinkFree Office).
3. Select to either Upgrade to Premium or use the Basic
2. Read the End User License Agreement, then tap Accept if
Navigation service at no charge.
you agree with the terms of use.
4. Enter the required information for TeleNav.
3. On its initial launch, tap Activate now.Three tabs display:
Theme Changer
• Home: displays the introduction to ThinkFree Office and lists a short
Allows you to change the current phone theme by selecting from description of each of the tabs and what type of information they
an array of existing themes. provide.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ • My Docs: This is where you keep your documents on this device.
You can manage documents, or send them to others, and upload
(Theme Changer).
the documents to ThinkFree Online.
2. Scroll across the screens to go through the available • Online: This provides your http://thinkfree.com online storage
themes. information. You can also share your documents to others without
using email attachments.

Tips & Tricks Twitter
Use the learn functionality to understand more about the features Twitter is a social networking and microblogging service that
and functions on your phone. allows you make or answer questions by sending short text
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ messages up to 140 characters in length, called "tweets", to
your friends, or "followers."
(Tips & Tricks).
2. Select an available tutorial:
(Twitter).
• Sidekick Physical Buttons
Universal Composer
• Jump Key
• Group Text The Universal Composer is a messaging feature that lets you
send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones
• Notification Pop-Up
or email addresses. This feature does much more than just send
• Media Hub and receive text, but incorporate other features such as
• T-Mobile Video Chat emoticons, audio, media and much more.
• Media Room 䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
• Text Input and Swype (Universal Composer).
3. Slide across the screen to progress through additional
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages
pages. via Universal Composer” on page 100.
157
Qik Video Chat To adjust application settings:
This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service. 1. Press and then tap Settings.
This application also lets you record and share experiences with 2. Choose from any of the following options:
your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.
• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.
– Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.
(Video Chat) ➔ Sign up. – Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.
2. Fill in the Email address, – YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.
Username, and – People: set up your contact sharing parameters.
Password, then tap Sign • Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is
embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video
up to create your new information with others, you can decide how accurate the related
account. location information can be. Choose from: Off, City level, Street
level, or Track live.
3. Follow the on-screen
• Video encoding quality allows you to assign a video quality to the
instructions. For outbound video. Choose from: Low, Normal, or High.
more information, visit: • About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat
http://qik.com/. application.

Recording Qik Video Visual Voicemail
1. From the Home screen, Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a
tap APPS voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want
(Applications) ➔ without being limited to chronological order.
(Video Chat). 䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Visual Voicemail).
2. Tap Record & Share.
For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on page 18.
3. Read the one-time
disclaimer describing the Voice Search
public nature of your The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that
allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the
videos and tap OK.
phone activates a Google search based on what you said.
4. Tap Record to start
For more information, refer to “Using Additional Voice Search
recording. Functions” on page 30.
– or – 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
Tap Stop to end the recording process. (Voice Search).
5. Enter a title for your video segment and select those 2. Select Agree if you want Google to use location for
services you wish to use to distribute your video. improved search results and other services, or Disagree to
• Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask decline.
that you select a recipient for your video segment. 3. At the Speak now screen speak your search command
slowly and clearly. Google searches for the information and
displays related information in the browser.
159
Web To configure YouTube Settings:
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully 䊳 Press ➔ Settings and configure the following
optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the parameters:
Internet browsing feature on your phone. • High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
(Web). network.
• Caption front size allows you to set the font size used by on-
For more information, refer to “Web” on page 161. screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Extra
Wi-Fi Calling Large.
This feature allows you to make calls using a Wi-Fi over the • Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube
searches from appearing within the search box.
T-Mobile network.
• SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
(Wi-Fi Calling). videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 58.
• Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.
YouTube
• Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload • Google Mobile and YouTube Terms of Service
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
• Google Mobile and YouTube Privacy Policies
• Application version displays the software version for the current
(YouTube). YouTube application.
2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and To watch a high quality video:
viewing posted videos. 䊳 While playing a video, press ➔ Settings ➔
High quality on mobile.
Section 10: Connections
Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly • More Sites: displays different on-screen pages containing
connect to the web. shortcuts to a variety of different applications (Email/IM,
Web Social/Chat, etc..) and categories (Sports, Weather,
En Español, My Account).
Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the
• Yahoo Mail: displays the Sign in for Yahoo Mail. Register by sending a
mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser
text message with the word START to 92500 if you are not already
and use the basic features.
registered.
Accessing the Internet • Facebook: displays the Facebook Log in. Sign up from this page if you
To access the Browser: are not already registered.
䊳 From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ • AccuWeather: based on your location settings, AccuWeather displays
(Web). the current weather conditions.
• CNN: displays current news headlines and more.
Homepage • ESPN: displays current sports news headlines and more.
When you access the Browser, the web2go home page displays the • E! Online: displays current entertainment news headlines and more.
following topics: • Mapquest: provides access to the online mapquest site.
• Google Search: allows you to quickly search for online topics using • Yelp: provides access to Yelp which is an online urban city guide that
the Google search engine. helps people find cool places to eat, shop, drink, relax and play. Its the
• Advertisement: provides an on-screen advertisement bubble fun and easy way to find, review and talk about what's great in your
providing suggested phone applications. world.
• Downloads: allows you to download Ringtone, Callertunes, Games, • What’s Now: provides quick access to a variety of different
Apps, or Gift and Deals. entertainment and shopping websites.
• My Account: provides quick access to your My Account page.
161
Navigating with the Browser – Add shortcut to Home: adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on
your phone’s Home screen.
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
– Add RSS feeds: adds RSS feeds to your browser.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your – Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.
finger in an up or down motion. – Page info: displays information about the selected page.
3. To return to the previous page, press . – Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a
message.
Browser Options – Downloads: displays the download history.
1. From the home page, press to access the following – Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by
options: changing these options. See “Browser Settings” on page 165.
Entering a URL
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple
URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites
Windows” on page 163. are optimized for viewing on your phone.
• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open. To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these steps:
• Brightness setting: allows you to manually adjust the screen 䊳 Tap the URL field at the top of the screen, enter the URL
brightness.
and tap Go.
Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings ➔ Display ➔
Brightness), you can not modify the browser’s brightness setting. Search the Internet
To perform an Internet search using keywords, follow these
• Refresh: reloads the current page. steps:
• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page. 1. Tap the Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to
• More: displays the following additional options:
search using the on-screen keypad.
– Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.
Connections 162
2. Tap (Search). A list of search results displays. Using Bookmarks
• Depnding on which screen you are on, the search icon might also While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly
appear as . and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website
3. Tap a link to view the website. addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks
page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most
Adding and Deleting Windows visited websites and view your History.
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To 1. From the Home webpage, tap . The Bookmarks page
add a new window, follow these steps: displays. Additional pages include FREQUENT and HISTORY.
1. From your browser, press and then tap New window.
2. Press to display the following options:
– or –
• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the
Press and then tap Windows ➔ New Window. last webpage that you viewed.
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a
2. A new browser window displays. thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view
3. Press and then tap Windows to see a list of all open to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
windows. • Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new
bookmarks.
Note: This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number 3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a
of active browser windows, bookmark for the following options:
4. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active • Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.
windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet • Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.
window. • Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the
bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing Bookmarks”
5. Tap next to the listing to delete the window. on page 164.
163
• Add shortcut to Home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked 3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the
webpage to your phone’s Home screen. bookmark or the URL.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, or Universal Composer. 4. Tap OK.
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a Deleting Bookmarks
message.
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more
information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 164. you want to delete.
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage. 2. Tap Delete bookmark.
Adding Bookmarks 3. At the confirmation window, tap OK.
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔ Add.
Emptying the Cookies
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during
bookmark and the URL. navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific
3. Assign a folder location. Home is the default. information, a cookie can also contain some personal information
(such as a username and password) which might pose a security
4. Tap OK. The new save page now appears on the risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from
Bookmarks page. your phone at any time.
Editing Bookmarks 1. From the Home webpage, press and then tap
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark More ➔ Settings ➔ Clear all cookie data.
you want to edit. 2. Tap Yes to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.
2. Tap Edit bookmark.
Connections 164
Using Web History Browser Settings
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed To make configure browser settings, follow these steps:
websites. These entries can be used to return to previously 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
unmarked web pages.
(Web).
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔ HISTORY tab.
2. Press and then tap More ➔ Settings.
A list of the most recently viewed websites displays.
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:
2. Tap an entry to display the webpage. • Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or
– or – Close.
Press and then tap Clear history to delete the current • Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed
web pages.
History list.
• Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.
Frequent • Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or
The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
and bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to
previously unmarked web pages. • Load images: Allows web page images to load along with the other
text components of a loaded website.
1. From the Home webpage, tap ➔ FREQUENT tab.
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of
A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays. the screen as possible.
The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of • Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal
position.
the list.
• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.
2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage. Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.
165
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe • Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or
Flash. passwords. Tap Yes to complete the process.
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page • Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue
and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this
disable this function. function.
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser. • Set search engine: Allows you to choose a default search engine
• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Memory card. for your phone. Choose from: Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap Yes to • Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.
complete the process. • Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap Yes to default.
complete the process. Bluetooth
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and About Bluetooth
read cookies from your device.
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function. Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless
devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out
approximately 30 feet.
forms. Tap Yes to complete the process.
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your
location.
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap
Yes to complete the process.
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
Connections 166
Turning Bluetooth On and Off Bluetooth Settings
To turn Bluetooth on: The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings. • Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark • Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth
indicates active). When active, displays in the devices
Status area. • Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
To turn Bluetooth off: To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings. Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature. 2. Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a check mark in the
Bluetooth field.
Bluetooth Status Indicators
3. Tap the Device name, Visible, and Scan devices fields to set
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance: the options.
Displays when Bluetooth is active. To change your Bluetooth name:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name.
3. Enter a new name.
4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.
167
To set visibility:
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their
partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
communicate. 1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds (2 minutes). This value
appears as a countdown within this field. Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
3. Tap Scan devices. Your device displays a list of discovered
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
in-range Bluetooth devices.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices to
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices
such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers. 5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK.
6. The external device must accept the connection and enter
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
your device’s PIN code.
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device. Once successfully paired to an external device,
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast, displays in the Status area.
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and
authentication process. Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-
compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and
functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all
Bluetooth-compatible devices.
Connections 168
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of
the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the the page). This opens the connected device’s menu
pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device, options.
there is no need to setup the connection information again.
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page). Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection. using a Bluetooth connection.
– or –
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the phone and the external device, and the recipient’s device must be
name of the previously paired device, and select visible.
Disconnect. Only a Contact’s information can be sent via Bluetooth. No other file
type (video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.
paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device
3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”
on-screen context menu.
and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the
previous pairing information. 4. Tap Send namecard via ➔ Bluetooth and select a paired
1. Verify Bluetooth is active. external Bluetooth device.
169
PC Connections
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for
the pairing to be successful. You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data
cable using various USB connection modes. When you connect
5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with Windows
list. Media Player, and transfer data to and from your device directly.
Enable Downloading for Web Applications What is Kies Mini?
Samsung Kies Mini is a software that enables you to update your
Important!: Before you can download a web application you must insert an device firmware by connecting to the PC.
SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature
(enables downloading). For more information, refer to “Installing To learn more about Samsung Kies Mini and other Samsung
the microSD Memory Card” on page 9. Also, see “Mounting the
SD Card” on page 51. applications:
1. Browse samsung Support site and locate your phone:
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads
Applications.
2. Navigate to the Software tab and download Kies Mini.
2. Tap the Unknown sources check box.
3. Tap Yes to allow install of non-Market applications. Important!: If you need any additional USB drivers, these can also be found
within the phone’s Download Center > Software tab.
Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the
installation of non-market applications.
Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect
your phone and data, use Android Market to install web
applications. For more information, refer to “Downloading a New
Google Application” on page 145.
Connections 170
Prior to using Kies Mini for Phone Update 3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction
Before using Kies Mini to upgrade your device, it is jack on your device to a PC.
recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use. 4. Run Samsung Kies Mini and follow the prompts to update
To export a Contact list to your microSD card: your device firmware.
1. From the Home screen, tap CONTACTS (Contacts). 5. Refer to Samsung Kies Mini Help for more information.
2. Press and then tap Import/Export.
Synchronizing with Windows Media Player
3. Tap Export to SD card ➔ OK. For more information, refer to
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.
“Export/Import” on page 97.
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card: Applications ➔ USB settings ➔ Media player.
1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔ 2. Press the Home key to return to Idle mode.
(Gallery).
3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos. jack on your device to a PC with Windows Media Player
3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD installed.
card prior to initiating a Kies Mini update. A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.
Connecting with Kies Mini 4. Open Windows Media Player to synchronize music files.
1. Install Samsung Kies Mini software on your PC. 5. Edit or enter your device’s name in the pop-up window.
2. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 6. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list
Applications ➔ USB settings ➔ Kies (Firmware update). and begin synchronizing.
171
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device Wi-Fi
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and About Wi-Fi
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain
device, you can also access the files directory from the memory types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi
card by using the device as a memory card reader. communication requires access to an existing and accessible
Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,
separate from the internal memory. (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring
knowledge of the Router name and password).
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from Activating Wi-Fi
or to the memory card.
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to
Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the
USB setting to Mass storage. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
Applications ➔ USB settings ➔ Mass storage. 2. Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates
that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range
3. Press to return to Idle mode.
wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks
4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC
on the same screen.
using an optional PC data cable.
A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.
5. Open the folder to view files.
6. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Connections 172
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network Manually Add a New Network Connection
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings. 2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
The network names and security settings (Open network or Point).
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in 3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
the Wi-Fi networks section. must match the current security setting on your target
2. Tap the network you wish to connect to. WAP.
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the
3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary). target WAP.
Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to
connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The
WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default
settings.
173
Deactivating Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings. the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:
• Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy
2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The
• Viewing the device’s MAC Address
checkmark grays.
• Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:
reduce battery life and use times. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 2. Press and then tap Advanced.
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings. Mobile AP
2. Press and then tap Scan. This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.
The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected to and Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as
Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP). Mobile AP service.
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is no
communication with a target Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Connections 174
To activate the Mobile AP service:
Note: Using your 4G service and Mobile AP Hotspot drains your phone’s
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature
combination.
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot ➔ The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it
Mobile AP. connected to a power supply.
2. Tap Mobile AP and place a checkmark in the adjacent field To connect to the Hotspot:
to activate the service. 1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device
(laptop, media device, etc.).
Note: If your Wi-Fi is already active, you will be asked to turn it off prior to
continuing with the MobileAp setup process. 2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your
phone hotspot from the network list.
3. Tap OK to continue with the activation.
• The default name for your phone’s hotspot is AndroidAPXXXX.
4. Write down the Network SSID name. This name is • You can change the name by tapping Mobile AP settings ➔
generally AndroidAPXXXX. This can be changed later. For Network SSID and changing the entry.
more security information, refer to page 176. 3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions
5. Confirm the Mobile AP service icon appears at the to complete the connection.
top of the screen. 4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet
connection.
Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended
that you access the Mobile AP settings and create a secure connection
by using a password for communication.
175
To secure the Mobile AP service:
The two most common methods for securing your connection to
the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide
your phone’s SSID name.
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot ➔
Mobile AP ➔ Mobile AP settings.
2. Tap the Network SSID field and change the name of the
Mobile AP.
3. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK.
4. With security enabled, enter a new password into the
Password field.
Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for
intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not
use names, birthdays, or
5. Tap the Hide my device field to keep your phone from

transmitting its Network SSID name.
Connections 176
Section 11: Time Management
This section describes how you can manage time using time- • Go to: displays a specific date.
related applications such as the Calendar, Alarm Clock, Analog or • Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting
Digital clock, and the World clock. the date.
Calendar • Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or
an individual event.
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a • Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
reminder. Creating a Calendar Event
Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.
S M T W T F
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19
(Calendar).
2. From the Month tab, press ➔ Create.
S M T W T F
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12 (Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs: Calendar Settings
14 15 16 17 18 19
•
Month: displays the Month view. Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which
you want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to
•
Week: displays the Week view.
view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to
•
Day: displays the Day view. manage events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.
•
List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week, 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date. S M T W T F
1 2 3 4 5
.
2. Press and select one of the following options:
7 8 9 10 11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19
• Search: allows you to search within your current events. 2. Press ➔ Settings.
• Create: creates a new Event.
177
3. Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want 11. Tap Vibrate to activate this notification option. Selections
to display or touch All calendars. A check mark indicates are: Always, Only in Silent mode, or Never.
selection. 12. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event
4. Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general notification.
synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates Alarm and Clocks
selection. This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified
5. Tap Default view and select a view: Month, Week, Day, or time, track time in other parts of the world, use a stopwatch, or
List. set a timer.
6. Tap Day views and select a type: Time grid, or Event list.
(Alarm & Clocks).
7. Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday.
Setting an Alarm
8. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
(Alarm & Clocks).
9. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your
2. Tap (Create alarm).
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from
within the Select time zone field. 3. Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour, and
minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification
was last selected).
method. Choose from: Alert, Status bar notification, and
Off.
Time Management 178

4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times 9. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to
you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: One-time decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the
event, Daily, Every weekday(Mon-Fri), or Weekly. If you volume level plays.
selected Weekly, a button row displays. Tap each day of World Clock
the week in which you want this alarm to repeat, then tap This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of
Save. world.
5. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
6. Tap the radio button to activate a tone for the Snooze. .
Tap the field to assign a duration time (3 min, 5 min, 2. Tap the WORLD CLOCK tab.
10 min, 15 min, or 30 min) and snooze repetition (1 time, 3. Tap (Add city) then scroll and select the desired city,
2 times, 3 times, 5 times, and 10 times). or tap in the search field to locate a city.
• Duration indicates the length of time the alrm will remain silent To assign DST settings:
between alarm notifications (snooze time).
1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.
• Snooze repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are
assigned to this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the 2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings.
alarm.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, 1 hour or 2 hours).
7. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:
Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, or Voice.
8. Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following:
Sounds, or Go to My files. Locate a sound to use as an
alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone.
179
Stopwatch
This feature allows you to use a stopwatch to time multiple laps.
(Alarm & Clocks) ➔ STOPWATCH tab.
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.
3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.
4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.
5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have
multiple lap times.
6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.
Setting a Timer
(Alarm & Clocks) ➔ TIMER tab.
2. Tap the hr, min, or sec field and use the on-screen keypad
to enter the hour, minute, or seconds.
3. Tap Start to start the timer.
4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and
start over.
5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.
Time Management 180

Section 12: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the sound and phone settings for your phone. Activating Wi-Fi
It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
extra settings associated with your phone.
Wireless and Networks
2. Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is
Using Flight mode
active.
Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane Wi-Fi settings
or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your phone automatically uses
prohibited. Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile phone services.
Important!: When your phone is in Flight Mode, it cannot send or receive any
calls or access online information or applications. Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2. Configure the settings as desired.
Wireless and network. The available connection types displayed with a security type
displayed next to them.
2. Tap Flight mode. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Flight mode is active.
181
Network Notification WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the name and wireless security PIN.
Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
receive notifications.
2. Tap WPS button connection.
3. Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2
minutes.
2. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to
Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network
the feature indicates Network notification is active.
3. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark
and deactivate this feature.
2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.
WPS Button Connection
3. Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy
and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use 4. Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) and Security settings
WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be then tap Save.
compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can
automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its purpose is
security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points, to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN — whether
accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must
computers, adapters, and other electronic devices. be configured with the same SSID.
Changing Your Settings 182

Bluetooth settings Activating Visibility
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings ➔ Visible.
discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with The phone is now activated for discovery for 119 seconds
which to pair.
so you can pair with another device. After 119 seconds the
Activating Bluetooth
phone becomes undiscoverable again.
Scanning for Devices
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you
2. Tap Bluetooth to turn it on.
can pair with them.
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings ➔
Activating the Device Name Scan devices.
1. Activate Bluetooth. Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered
2. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ devices in the Bluetooth devices section.
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings ➔ Device name. 2. Tap a device name to pair with the device.
The assigned device name displays.
Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to
3. Press to erase the current device name and enter a confirm and pair with them.
new name for this device using the keyboard.
3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and
4. Tap OK to confirm your setting.
tap OK.
183
Tethering To disconnect tethering:
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the
the Mobile AP feature.
check mark and deactivate the feature.
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while 3. Remove the USB cable from the phone.
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
downloads. Mobile AP
For more information, refer to “Mobile AP” on page 174.
Help
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
Provides an on-screen description of USB Tethering and Portable
2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your Wi-Fi hotspots.
phone. VPN settings
3. When prompted for a USB mode, press twice to exit The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual
the menu. Private Networks (VPNs).
4. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering and portable hotspot
Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.
menu. This places a check mark next to the entry and
activates the feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active
notification briefly appears on the screen.
Look for the Tethering active icon in the Status bar
area of the screen.

Adding a VPN To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/IPSec):
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to 1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2 2. Set the VPN server.
Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based
L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec). 3. Set IPSEc pre-shared key.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 4. Enable L2TP secret.
Wireless and network ➔ VPN settings. 5. Set L2TP secret.
2. Tap Add VPN. 6. Set the DNS search domains.
To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol): To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec):
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection). 1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
2. Set the VPN server. 2. Set the VPN server.
3. Enable encryption (if desired). 3. Enable L2TP secret.
4. Set the DNS search domains. 4. Set L2TP secret.
To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol): 5. Set user certificate.
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
Note: A user certificate must be installed to use this setting.
2. Set the VPN server.
3. Enable L2TP secret. 6. Set CA certificate.
4. Set L2TP secret.
Note: A CA certificate must be installed to use this setting.
5. Set the DNS search domains.
7. Set the DNS search domains.
185
Mobile networks Access Point Names
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the (hotspot).
Mobile networks options. 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Access Point
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks. Names. A list of the Access point names display. The active
The following options display: access point displays a bright green, filled circle to the
Use packet data right of the name.
Allows you to activate data usage on your phone. Network mode
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.
Use packet data. 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Data Roaming Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s mode.

partner networks and access data services when you are out of
your service providers area of coverage.
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Data roaming.

Using the 4G Network
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,
the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both Using the 3G Network
the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.
If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,
This phone is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this
follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.
connection.
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
mode.
mode.
2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option
2. Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next
to indicate that it is active.
to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default
Network Operators
mode for this phone.
Using the 2G (EDGE) Network
Using this feature you can view the current network connection.
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set
If you are not using applications that require the 3G network the network selection to Automatic.
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a
browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks.
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network 2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection
mode. displays at the bottom of the list.
2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an
indicate that it is active. available network.
187
3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network. Call Settings
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network To access the Call settings menu:
connection. 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Call settings.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time. – or –
Default Setup Options From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search (Settings) ➔ Call settings.
for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to Configuring General Call Settings
select a network each time you connect.
Configure the general call settings using this option.
(Settings) ➔ Call settings ➔ All calls.
operators.
2. Tap one of the following options:
2. Tap Default setup.
• Show my number: allows you to select how your ID is handled
3. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually. when an outgoing call is initiated.
– or – • Auto reject: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or
Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a messages.
network. • Answering call: selects how your phone answers incoming calls.
Enable Answering mode, then select one of the following methods
for answering the phone:
– Answering mode activates or deactivates the answering mode
function.
– Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.
– Automatic answering ,when connected, automatically answers a call – Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary number
via the headset after a period of time. Selections are: Off, after 1 that you specify.
second, after 2 seconds, after 3 seconds, after 4 seconds, or after 5 – Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your
seconds. phone is busy.
• Prefix dialing: when activated, this feature automatically prepends – Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your
a string of numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number. voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and otherwise
This feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an allows you to enter a voicemail number.
area code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one
– Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your
prefix. For more information, refer to “Prefix Dialing” on
voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned off.
page 55.
• Call barring: allows specified numbers to be barred from this
• Reject call with message: allows you to send a message phone.
immediately after rejecting a call.
• Call waiting: enables call waiting functionality. When deactivated,
• Call status tones: sets a tone to play for the following status tones: all incoming calls are directed to your voicemail if you are already on
Call connect tone, Minute minder, or Call end tone. Touch each type an active call.
of status tone you want to play.
• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to
• Outgoing call vibration: allows your phone to vibrate when the connect or the call is cut off.
called party answers.
Fixed Dialing Numbers
• Alerts on call: activates an alert tone for new messages being
received during an active call. Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a
Configuring Voice Calls limited set of phone numbers.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Enabling FDN
Call settings ➔ Voice call. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔

Call settings ➔ Fixed Dialing Numbers.
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Call forwarding: configures call forwarding options: 2. Tap Enable FDN.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
189
Managing the FDN List
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
menu does not display. When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
service for assistance.
Changing the PIN2 Code
2. Tap Enable FDN.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
FDN is enabled.
2. Tap Change PIN2.
4. Tap FDN list then press and then tap Add contact or
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code. edit the contacts that were stored.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
5. Confirm your PIN2 code. menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer
menu does not display. service for assistance.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer
service for assistance.

Voicemail Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check
You can view your voicemail number from this menu. with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is
compatible with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that
Call settings ➔ Voicemail.
plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not
2. Tap Voicemail service and select My carrier. provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
3. Tap Voicemail number to now view your number within the manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
Voicemail number field. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ TTY mode.
HAC Mode
2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid
Compatibility for this device. feature. Off is the default setting.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Drive Smart
Call settings ➔ HAC mode. The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions
from your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to
2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the
voicemail and customizing auto responses to both callers and
feature. Off is the default setting. text message respondents notifying them that your driving.
TTY Mode 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a DriveSmart.
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
For more information, refer to “DriveSmart” on page 139.
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
191
Sound Settings Setup Phone Vibration
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound.
as configure the display settings. 2. Tap Vibrate and select a vibration mode:
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound.
• Always
The following options display: • Never
Silent mode • Only in silent mode
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from • Only when not in silent mode
making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the
Note: The Phone vibrate setting is independent of other call sounds settings.
speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of For example, if you have Silent mode enabled with Phone vibrate, your
incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined phone won’t play a ringtone, but will vibrate for an incoming call.
tone or sound as an alert.
Adjusting the Volume Settings
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound.
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume
2. Tap Silent mode.
settings within one on-screen popup menu.
– or – 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound
1. From the Home screen, press and hold the Lock key until ➔ Volume.
Phone options displays.
2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume
2. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the settings for any of the following volume levels.
current mode displays).
• Incoming call volume, Media volume, System volume, or
Notification volume.
3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.

Setup the Voice Call Ringtone Screen Lock Sounds
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound. The screen lock sounds option is used to activate/deactivate
2. Tap Phone ringtone. sounds when locking and unlocking the screen.
3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly
plays when selected. 2. Tap Screen lock sounds. A check mark displayed next to
these features indicates active status.
4. Tap OK to assign a ringer.
Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity
Setting a Notification Ringtone
Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound
when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the
➔ Notification ringtone.
intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.
2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Sound.
Audible Tone Settings 2. Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the
The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used feature indicates Haptic feedback is active.
when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each 3. Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to
time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone
adjust the vibration intensity, then touch OK.
sounds.
2. Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection. A check mark
displayed next to these features indicates active status.
193
Display Settings • TV out: connects your phone to your television (using an optional
cable) and displays any image stored on the phone directly on your
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display television.
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock
• My Social Network Status: updates your social network status
feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power saving
directly from within the Notification Panel. For more information,
mode, and tv out settings. refer to “Notification Bar” on page 27.
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Connecting your Phone to the TV
Display. The following options display: TV out
• Wallpapers: assigns either the Home screen or Lock screen This feature allows you to connect your phone to your television
wallpaper images.
(using an optional cable) and view any imaged stored on the
• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are: phone and view it directly on your television.
Default font, Choco cooky, Cool jazz, and Rosemary. Tap Get fonts
online to download additional fonts.
Note: The TV system (NTSC) option is used if you are connecting to an older,
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic analog NTSC system.
brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and tap OK.
• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically
switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.
When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode
only.
• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window
elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some
animations, or All animations.
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds,
1 minute, 2 minutes, and 10 minutes.

To use the TV out feature: Enabling the GPS Satellites
Display ➔ TV out. Location and security.
2. Tap one of the following options: 2. Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.
• TV out: to play all of the phone's video output through the TV-out Enabling the sensor aiding
feature.
• TV system: to play the phone's video out through an analog TV
video system converter (NTSC/PAL). Location and security. For more information, refer to
“Enabling a Location source” on page 143.
Note: NTSC is usually used in America.
2. Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save
Location and Security power while using the sensors.
The Location and Security settings allow you to configure phone Screen Unlock Pattern Settings
location and security settings.
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a
Using Wireless Networks screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use automatically turns off).
wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.
Location and security.
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information
using the wireless network.
195
Setting an Unlock Pattern 7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.
phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will Changing the Screen Lock Pattern
draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to
unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock
the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to
while drawing the pattern. changing your password from time to time.
Location and security. Location and security.
2. Tap Set screen lock ➔ Pattern. 2. Tap Set screen lock ➔ Change screen lock.
3. Read the instructions then tap Next. 3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
4. Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a 4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous
pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern. section.
5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point. Using Visible a Pattern
Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag When enabled, this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is
your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line used to unlock the phone.
overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green Using Tactile Feedback
circle. When enabled, the User tactile feedback option, you will feel
6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical, vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern.
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the

screen and tap Continue.
PIN Lock and Unlock Setting up SIM Card Lock
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
Location and security. unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your
SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
2. Tap Set screen lock.
3. Tap PIN.
Location and security.
4. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock.
OK to confirm the password.
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then touch OK.
5. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN
code.
order to unlock the phone.
Password Lock and Unlock To change an existing SIM Card PIN:
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 1. Tap Change SIM PIN.
Location and security. 2. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK.
2. Tap Set screen lock. 3. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
3. Tap Password. 4. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap OK to confirm
the password.
5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to
confirm.
197
Password Settings Credential Storage
When you create a phone password you can also configure the This option allows certain applications to access secure
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials
asterisk (*). can be installed to the SD card and password protected.
Location and security. Location and security.
2. Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature. 2. Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check
Device Administration mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure
credentials is active.
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone
in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This 3. Tap Install encrypted certificates to install encrypted
would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or certificates from the memory (SD) card.
stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through
4. Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage
administration) from a remote location.
password.
Location and security. 5. Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone
memory) of all contents and reset the credentials
2. Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this
password.
setting.
3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.

Applications Managing Applications
This phone can be used for Android development. You can write This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run view and control currently running services, or use the device for
the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This application development.
feature allows you to configure the device for development. You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as
well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the
Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer end-
users. Because the device can be configured with system applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
Unknown Sources Clearing Application Cache and Data
Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature.
use this option to install non-Market applications.
Applications. Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature. 2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap Clear data or Clear cache.
199
Uninstalling Third-party Applications Running Services
The Running services option allows you to view and control
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature. currently running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SNS
(messaging), Swype, and more.
Applications ➔ Manage applications. Applications ➔ Running services
2. Tap the Third-party tab and select your desired application. The screen displays all the processes that are running.
3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application 2. Tap a process to stop the process from running.
info page).
When you stop the process the service or application will
4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application. no longer run until you start the process or application
5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap again.
OK.
Important!: Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the
application.

Android Development USB Settings
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ This menu selects the method of communication for the USB
Applications ➔ Development. port.
Important!: These features are used for development purposes only. Note: Before initiating a USB connection with the phone you must disable the
Bluetooth feature, and/or USB debugging feature.
USB Debugging 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔

This feature is used for development purposes only. Applications ➔ USB settings.
Allowing Mock Locations 2. Select one of the following USB modes:
This feature is used for development purposes only. • Kies (Firmware update): connects your phone to a PC and
If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using prepares it for a direct firmware update.
this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different • Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize
GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock” files with Windows Media Player.
the coordinates. • Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive. For
more information, refer to “Memory Card” on page 50.
• Ask on connection: asks for a connection type when you connect
to a computer.
201
Theme settings 2. Tap Jump key shortcuts to assign shortcuts to
Provides quick access to the Theme Changer application that combinations of your Jump key ( ) and a keyboard key.
allows you to change the current phone theme by selecting from For example: tapping and pressing the a key quickly
an array of existing themes. accesses
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ – or –
Theme settings.
Tap Lock screen shortcut to assign a shortcut action when
For more information, refer to “Theme Changer” on page 156. you drag the upper piece of the lock screen.
Jump key settings
To assign a shortcut to the lock screen:
Assigns functions to either your Keyboard or Lock screen 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
shortcuts.
Jump key settings.
The Jump key settings screen displays a list of quickly accessible
and recently used functions. This list continually changes based 2. Tap Lock screen shortcut.
on your frequent use of various features and functions. 3. Select an available category from the list.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 4. From the next screen select the desired function to
Jump key settings. shortcut. Once selected you are returned to the Jump key
settings screen with the new function inserted within the
Lock screen shortcut description.

Accounts and Synchronization Synchronizing a Google Account
Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These
of different sources or sites. These accounts can range from must be manually added.
Google, a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server, and other To manage an existing Google account:
social sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate
and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar
events and Contacts. Accounts and sync.
To enable the auto-sync feature: 2. Tap Add account ➔ Google.

1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 3. Tap Next ➔ Sign in.
Accounts and sync.
– or – Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the
on-screen prompts to create your new account.
From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
(Accounts & Sync). 4. Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields
and enter your information.
2. Tap Auto-sync. A check mark indicates the feature is
5. Tap Sign in. Your phone then communicates with the
enabled. This feature enables the synchronization of data
Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing
between your phone and external sites or servers.
Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts
• The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar
Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to area of the screen.
the managed accounts list. • Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the automatically updated to your device.
background.
203
To configure the Google management settings: Synchronizing Your Corporate Account
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by
Accounts and sync. the device. These must be manually added.
2. Tap within the Google account field to reveal the
Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as
account’s synchronization settings screen. a managed account.
3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
Contacts, Sync Gmail, or Sync Calendar). A check mark synchronize with a corporate email account.
indicates the feature is enabled. 1. From the Home screen, tap APPS (Applications) ➔
4. Press to return to the previous screen. (Settings) ➔ Accounts and sync.
For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” – or –
on page 93. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync.
2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to

synchronize.
4. Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync
Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to manually sync the
account.

Privacy Settings Factory Data Reset
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to
erase all personal data. the factory default settings.
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Privacy. Privacy. (You will see a disclaimer.)
Mobile Backup and Restore 2. Touch Factory data reset ➔ Reset phone.
The phone can be configured to back up your current settings, 3. If necessary, enter your password and touch Erase
application data and settings. everything.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ The phone resets to the factory default settings
Privacy. automatically and when finished displays the Home
2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current screen.
phone settings and applications. SD Card & Phone Storage
3. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
previously installed application (including preferences and memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.
data). For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,
see “Using the SD Card” on page 50.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
SD card and phone storage.The available memory
displays under the Total space and Available space
headings.
205
Notification Pop-up If messaging notification is enabled, you can choose to receive
This menu allows you to configure the parameters for on-screen on-screen notifications for messages such as SMS(text), MMS
message notifications. It allows you to activate/deactivate (multimedia text messages), and group texting messages.
notifications, assign allowed notification types, block email To configure messaging notifications:
notifications, and set a duration time for the on-screen 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
notification. Notification pop-up.
To activate the pop-up function:
2. Tap the Messaging field to activate the feature. A check
mark appears when the feature is active.
Notification pop-up.
To prevent on-screen email notifications:
2. Tap the Notification pop-up field to activate the feature.
A check mark appears when the feature is active.
To deactivate the pop-up function:
2. Tap Email notifications and select an email account name.
3. Tap OK to store the new filter.
To set the duration for on-screen ups:
2. Tap the Notification pop-up field to deactivate the feature.
When there is no check mark, the feature is deactivated.
2. Tap the Set duration for each notification. This assigns how
long the pop-up remains on-screen.
3. Select a duration time: 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 7 seconds, or
9 seconds.
LED settings
Available LED notification
Allows you to configure the color being used to notify a user on a colors
recent activity. You can choose to have any of four colors
displayed within the Notification LED when a chosen activity is
detected.
These activities consist of:
• New SMS and MMS
• Missed Call
• New Email
• Power charging
Search Settings
Note: Once the battery has reached a100% charged state, the battery LED
no longer turns on. You can use your phone's search preferences to configure some
aspects of Google Web search (for example, whether it makes
To assign an LED setting for a particular activity: suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type), and what
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ LED phone features you want to include in searches.
settings. 1. Slide open the screen to reveal the QWERTY keyboard.
2. Tap an onscreen activity and select an available color. 2. Press (Search).

3. Press and then tap Search settings.
207
4. Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter Language & Keyboard Settings
the settings: This setting allows you to configure the language in which to
• Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.
search preferences. 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
– Show web suggestions: includes search matches from Google’s Locale and text.
online search engine.
– Use My Location: uses your My Location information for Google Language Settings
search results and services. To set the language that the menus display on the phone:
– Search history: determines whether you also wish to included
personalized search history results in the list of matches.
– Manage search history: helps to manage the personalized search Locale and text ➔ Select locale.
history associated with your current registered Google account. 2. Select a language and region from the list.
• Searchable items: opens a screen where you can choose the
search categories included in device searches. such as: Web, Select Input Method
Apps, Contacts, Memo, Messaging, Phone, Twitter or Voice There are two input methods available: Swype and Samsung
Search.
keypad.
• Clear shortcuts: erases the history for recently selected search
results. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
Locale and text ➔ Select input method.
2. Select an input method.

Swype Settings Swype Advanced settings
For more information, refer to “Configuring SWYPE Settings” on Advanced settings provide access to Swype operation
page 70. parameters.
1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ • Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the
Locale and text ➔ Swype.
next word.
2. Tap one of the following Swype preferences to activate the • Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
setting: sentence.
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language. • Show complete trace: determines whether or not to display the
Default language is US English. complete Swype trace path on-screen.
• Word prediction: uses a built-in word database to predict words • Word choice window: sets the amount of times the word choice
while entering text in Swype. selection window displays on screen. Move the slider between
Never or Always and tap OK.
• Audio feedback: turns off sounds generated by the Swype
application. • Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK.
text using the keypad.
Swype Help settings
• Enable tip indicator: turns on an on-screen flashing indicator that
provides helpful user information. Help settings provide access to Swype help operation
parameters.
• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.
• Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input
text faster in Swype input mode.
209
About 6. Tap the Auto-capitalization field to automatically capitalize
Provides information about the current Swype application the first letter of a sentence.
version. 7. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. This is
Samsung Keypad Settings an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked
For more information, refer to “Using the Samsung Keypad” on speech recognition application.
page 74.
8. Tap Auto-full stop to automatically insert a full stop by
tapping the space bar twice.
Locale and text ➔ Samsung keypad.
9. Tap the Tutorial field to view a short tutorial on use of the
2. Tap Portrait Keypad types and select a text input method:
Samsung keyboard.
• Qwerty Keypad
XT9 Advanced Settings
• 3x4 Keypad
3. Tap Input languages and select a language. The following XT9 Advanced settings are available when the XT9
field is selected.
4. Tap XT9 to use XT9 Predictive text method. For more
1. Tap the XT9 field to select XT9 (predictive text) mode, then
information, refer to “XT9 Advanced Settings” on
tap XT9 advanced settings.
page 210. For more information, refer to “Text Input
2. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.
Methods” on page 69.
Your phone predicts how to complete the word typed.
5. Tap the Keypad sweeping field if you want to sweep the
3. Tap the Word completion point field then touch 2 letters, 3
keypad and change from ABC to ?123 mode. For more
letters, 4 letters, or the 5 letters radio button. Word
information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 69.
completion begins after 2 or more (depending on your
selection).
4. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects 11. Tap XT9 auto-substitution to add words to substitute (for
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible example youve becomes you’ve). A list of substitutions
words that reflect the characters of the keys you touched displays.
as well as the characters of nearby keys. 12. If you do not see the substitution you want, press and
5. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word then tap Add, then input the Shortcut word and
prediction. Substitution word.
6. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions. 13. Tap Done.
7. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace Device Keyboard Settings
words that you are typing. This option assists with For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 69.
correcting misspelled words. 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
8. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the Locale and text ➔ Device keyboard.
device to automatically correct mistyped words according 2. Tap the Auto-replace field to automatically replace words
to normal spelling for your region. that you are typing. This option assists with correcting
9. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to misspelled words.
re-display the word suggestion list when you select the 3. Tap the Auto-cap field to automatically capitalize the first
wrong word from the list. letter in a new sentence.
10. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary: 4. Tap the Auto-punctuate field to automatically provide
Tap the XT9 my words field, then press and then tap punctuation once the space key is presses twice.
Add. Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words
field, then tap Done.
211
Voice Input and Out Settings Configuring Text-to-speech
Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of
This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input. on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller
information.
Voice input and output ➔ Voice recognition settings.
Voice input and output ➔ Text-to-speech settings.
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings
associated with this feature:
associated with this feature:
• Language: selects an input language and associated dialect
recognition (if available). • Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-
speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.
• SafeSearch: sets the explicit image filter settings. These settings
apply to only Google voice search results. Choose from: Off, • Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are
Moderate, or Strict. automatically ready out loud.
• Block offensive words: allows you to block recognition of known • Always use my settings: accepts an override of application
offensive words or language. (A check mark indicates the feature is settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings
active). screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech
feature.
• Show hints: displays hints on a search box.
• Default engine: sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used
3. Press to return to the previous screen. for the spoken text. Choices include: Pico TTS.
• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data
required for voice synthesis.
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by
the device. Choose from: Very slow, Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very
fast.

• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Choose Date and Time
from American English or Spanish.
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
• Pico TTS: configures the pico TTS settings for various languages. displayed.
Accessibility Settings 1. Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
This service is able to collect all the text you type, including Date and time.
personal data credit card numbers except passwords. It may also
log your user interface interactions. It comes from the 2. Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.
applications such as KickBack, SoundBack, and TalkBack.
Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.
Accessibility. 3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the
Month, Day, and Year then touch Set.
Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility applications
from the Android Market. 4. Tap Select time zone, then touch a time zone.
5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and
2. If prompted, follow your on-screen instructions to
Minute. Touch PM or AM, then tap Set.
download accessibility apps (such as Talkback) from the
Android Market. • Optional: Touch Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the
phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
3. Tap Accessibility to activate the feature, then select the 6. Tap Select date format and touch the date format type.
services for which you want data to log.
Note: The (Power key) ends all calls (check/uncheck).
213
About Phone • System tutorial: provides a quick, online tutorial that walks you
through basic phone features. Read the on-screen information and
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial follow the system prompts.
information, and other phone information such as the model
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version, and
software build number. • Firmware version: displays the firmware version loaded on this
handset.
To access phone information:
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this
䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔ handset.
About phone. The following information displays: • Kernal version: displays the kernal version loaded on this handset.
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery • Build number: displays the software, build number.
(percentage), the phone number for this device, the network
connection, signal strength, mobile network type, service state, Note: Firmware, baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used for
roaming status, mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEI SV, Wi-Fi updates to the handset or support. For additional information please
contact your T-Mobile service representative.
MAC address, Bluetooth address, and Up time.
• Battery use: displays the applications or services (in percentages) Software Update
that are using battery power.
The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to
• Legal information: This option displays information about Open
source licenses as well as Google legal information. This connect to the network and upload any new phone software
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of latest available software when you access this option.
Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent 䊳 Press ➔ and then tap (Settings) ➔
information as a reference.
Read the information and terms, then press BACK to return to the Software update.
Settings menu. The phone automatically updates the software (if
available).

Section 13: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially
in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high
using your mobile device. levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects
causes no known adverse health effects.
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
following information: energy.
Do cell phones pose a health hazard? Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems. biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,
emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of
biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation
failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with
failed to show an association between exposure to radio relatively low frequencies.
frequency from a cell phone and health problems.
215
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every
flow in them to carry away excess heat. day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and
RF and certain health problems? errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.
Additional information about Interphone can be found at
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition, http://com.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/.
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have
shown a connection have failed. Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association monitor developments in this field.
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)
adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has
supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge. The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring
Some of these studies are described below. of a large group of people to determine if there are any health
Interphone Study issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy
from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A 30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000
people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar
number of healthy controls.
Health and Safety Information 216

Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields Cell Phone Industry Actions
in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS) Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a
between exposure to radio frequency energy from number of steps, including the following:
communication technologies including cell phones and brain • Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for
cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
study involving 14 European and non-European countries. • Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the
Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at user; and
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/ • Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
view.php?ID=39. information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies
of the National Cancer Institute such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
continue to adequately protect the public.
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for
brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use
has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987
and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did
not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
217
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
Accessories from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience
and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy want to use your phone while driving.
(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from
there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned
RF Radiation
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple
steps to minimize your RF exposure. Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone; from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce
head and the cell phone. risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing
Hands-Free Kits
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and have shown that these products generally do not work as
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may
absorption from cell phones. be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone increase in RF absorption.
is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved Children and Cell Phones
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when
cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.
used against the head and against the body.
The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to
children and teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the • World Health Organization (WHO):
head and the cell phone. http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have • International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at http://www.icnirp.de.
all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom • Health Protection Agency:
made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that • US Food and Drug Administration:
using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
health hazard exists. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various Information
sources can be obtained from the following organizations Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
(updated 10/1/2010): designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for
• FCC RF Safety Program: Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/. Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/. the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
219
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of minimum of 1.5 cm from the body.
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). exposure guidelines.
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance
for any variations in measurements. with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions for this model phone as reported to the FCC are:
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest • Head: 0.34 W/Kg.
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the • Body-worn: 0.96 W/Kg.
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual
2.4GHZ WLAN
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to • Head: 0.32 W/Kg.
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power • Body-worn: 0.54 W/Kg.
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case
the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model of the phone.
phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.

Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and
find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in
phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be certain areas.
obtained at www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar. Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call
Smart Practices While Driving go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,
On the Road - Off the Phone driving comes first, not the call!
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
his or her vehicle. tips:
• Use a hands-free device;
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to • Secure your phone within easy reach;
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has • Place calls when you are not moving;
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the • Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which • Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving
may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so and will suspend the call if necessary;
absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an
responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to
automobile:
understand and address distractions.
221
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or Battery Use and Safety
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage.
Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries
automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an
automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result • Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt
in fines, penalties, or other damages. to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-
driver's clear view of the street and traffic. circuit, resulting in overheating.
• Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle. Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even
when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the
while operating a vehicle. phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org. provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working
properly.
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with
an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,
iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high
temperatures.
• Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or the
battery may explode when overheated.

• Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking battery • Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some
fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable
options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center. manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even
• Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery, counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If
phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,
it to a service center for inspection. contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way. • Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging
• Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry, risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,
clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals damages to your phone, or other serious hazard.
of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting. customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Important!: Important: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge
your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only
specifically designed for your phone.
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must
be recycled or disposed of properly.
Warning!: Warning: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused accessories may not be available in your area.
by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile
device by working with respected take-back companies in every
state in the country.
223
Drop It Off Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be Or call, (877) 278-0799.
found at: http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp.
and batteries
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at
these locations for no fee. Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with
local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where the environment - recycle!
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information
regarding specific locations may be found at: Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/. UL Certified Travel Charger
Mail It In The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions
customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to per UL guidelines:
http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/ FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=STA_rec LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
yle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out a
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile
device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for
recycling.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN
INSTRUCTIONS. MOBILE DEVICE
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the
THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER
OUTLET. touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY and void the warranty. For more information, please refer
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR to the “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 236.
MOUNT POSITION.
GPS & AGPS
Display / Touch-Screen
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
Please note the following information when using your mobile System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses
device: satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY changes implemented in accordance with the Department of
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
Changes may affect the performance of location-based
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or technology on your mobile device.
if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is
broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.
225
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the • Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your ability; and
wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data • Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with instructs you.
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for Navigation
details.
Your Location
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do
Location-based information includes information that can be change over time. In some areas, complete information may not
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device. be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use before following them. All users should pay attention to road
applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact
directions), such applications transmit location-based safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
information. The location-based information may be shared with
third-parties, including your wireless service provider,
applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties
providing services.
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the
emergency responders your approximate location.

Emergency Calls If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates first need to deactivate those features before you can make an
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to
in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.
never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of
communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call
traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate until given permission to do so.
method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, Care and Maintenance
to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
on and in a service area with adequate signal strength. craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you
device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile to enjoy this product for many years:
device features are in use. Check with local service providers. Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
To make an emergency call: Liquids of any kind
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on. Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids
2. From the Home screen, tap . Enter the emergency contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the
number for your present location (for example, 911 or mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the
use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage
other official emergency number), then tap .
the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not
Emergency numbers vary by location. use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an
electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.
227
Extreme heat or cold Responsible Listening
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion. sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to
Dust and dirt
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand. preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that
Cleaning solutions using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and
cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or
slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.
other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also
Shock or vibration been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
handling can break internal circuit boards. susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing
Paint problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for
operation. everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and
equipment.

You should follow some common sense recommendations when any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio
using any portable audio device: device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
audio source. following sources:
• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at
which you can hear adequately. American Academy of Audiology
• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the
Reston, VA 20190
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear Voice: (800) 222-2336
what you are listening to. Email: info@audiology.org
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
Internet: http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling National Institutes of Health
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
when using earbuds.
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
is required before you hearing could be affected. Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience
229
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices
395 E Street, S.W. Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment
Suite 9200
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless
Patriots Plaza Building mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Washington, DC 20201 Implantable Medical Devices
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4647) A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636) between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Persons who have such devices:
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html • Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from
1-888-232-6348 TTY their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;
• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
Operating Environment • Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, minimize the potential for interference;
and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is • Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. to suspect that interference is taking place;
When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another • Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your
device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using
not connect incompatible products. your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,
consult your health care provider.

For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf- Potentially Explosive Environments
faqs.html#. Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially
Other Medical Devices explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio
device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not
external RF energy. always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,
Vehicles
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the powders, and any other area where you would normally be
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added
to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices
require you to do so.
231
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile
Regulations for Wireless Devices device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for
your personal needs.
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is
mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids. the better/higher of the two ratings.
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements
telecommunications services for persons with hearing and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices
disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher
some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants), of the two ratings.
users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device
hearing devices are more immune than others to this manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find
interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is
interference they generate. relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.
for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6
mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing is considered for best use. If a hearing aid meets the M2 level
devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating,
that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the sum of the two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T
the box. ratings. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on usage” while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless
the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device mobile device.
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to
“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that
is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be
synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be
synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are
recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries
Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section
20.19 of the FCC Rules.
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the M3 + M2 = 5 T3 + T2 = 5
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.
HAC/Wi-Fi Language Restricting Children's Access to Your
This mobile device has been tested and rated for use with Mobile Device
hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the
in this mobile device that have not been tested yet for use with mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device
hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this bill.
mobile device thoroughly and in different locations, using your Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of
hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any the reach of small children.
interfering noise. Consult your service provider about its return
and exchange policies and for information on hearing aid
compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange
policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.
233
FCC Notice and Cautions Other Important Safety Information
FCC Notice • Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in
dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your
to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as vehicle are securely mounted.
propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection • Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
National Fire Protection Association. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials
Cautions in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or
accessories.
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly • For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
approved in this document could void your warranty for this inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in
Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of
defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to
sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.
the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or
denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

• If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,
take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there
will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.
• Dispose of phones in accordance with local regulations. In some areas,
the disposal of phones in household or business trash may be
prohibited. For safe disposal options for phones, contact your nearest
Samsung authorized service center.
235
Section 14: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty items, including framing, and any non-operative parts unless caused by
What is Covered and For How Long? SAMSUNG; (b) defects or damage resulting from excessive force when
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG") pressing on a touch screen; (c) equipment that has the serial number or
warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that SAMSUNG's the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or
phones and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in made illegible; (d) any plastic surfaces or other externally exposed parts
material and workmanship under normal use and service for the that are scratched or damaged due to normal use; (e) malfunctions
period commencing upon the date of purchase and continuing for resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with
the following specified period of time after that date: accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or
approved by SAMSUNG; (f) defects or damage from improper testing,
operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not
Phone 1 Year
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage from
Batteries 1 Year external causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, flooding,
Leather Case 90 Days sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, or from exposure to
weather conditions, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper
Holster 90 Days use of any electrical source; (h) defects or damage caused by cellular
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year signal reception or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; (i) any other acts which are not the fault of
What is Not Covered? This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper SAMSUNG; or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States.
use of Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls
defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited
abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged
dampness, neglect, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging
stress, or defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural the battery, (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show
Warranty Information 236
evidence of tampering, or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or
other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified. return of such Product.
What are SAMSUNG's Obligations? During the applicable warranty What Are The Limits On Samsung's Warranty/liability? EXCEPT AS
period, SAMSUNG will repair or replace, at SAMSUNG's sole SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN,
option, without charge to Purchaser, any defective component PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO
part of Product. To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS,
Purchaser must return Product to an authorized phone service EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND
facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT
Purchaser's sales receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale LIMITED TO:
showing the original date of purchase, the serial number of • THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
Product and the sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE;
on where to deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at • WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT;
1-888-987-4357. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair • DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT;
or replace the defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's
• THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS
sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or
CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
components when repairing any Product or replace Product with
• COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY
a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,
LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO.
pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)
days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be warranted for a NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE
period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
the original Product or for 90 days, whichever is longer. All WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. ALL IMPLIED
replaced parts, components, boards and equipment shall WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY ARISE BY OPERATION OF
become the property of SAMSUNG. If SAMSUNG determines that LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, Purchaser MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
HEREBY LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS
237
WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW WHICH PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND WILL ALWAYS BE
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW
ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG PERMITS.
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE PURCHASER MAY USE THIRD-
FROM THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE
PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE USE OR PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS
LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE BREACH OF THE AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR
EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
PROFITS OR BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY TORT EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR FAULT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR
COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH
BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT. THE QUALITY,
PURCHASER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH
TO YOU. THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE MAY BE.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between
ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. THIS Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing reflects this
LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE allocation of risk and the limitations of liability contained in this Limited
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND STATES PURCHASER'S Warranty. The agents, employees, distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS are not authorized to make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or
HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH make additional warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly,
PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE additional statements such as dealer advertising or presentation,
ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
whether oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
should not be relied upon. ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC "DECLINE" BUTTON, DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
1301 E. Lookout Drive 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this
Richardson, Texas 75082 EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357) media of one computer and use the Software on a single
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights reserved. computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make
the Software available over a network where it could be used by
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes
notice. [021710] only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or
End User License Agreement for Software other proprietary notices contained on the original.
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement 2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and licensed, not sold.
may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or 3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except
THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO
239
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software. indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as terms.
part of the product support services related to the Software 7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide comply with all applicable international and national laws that
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration
this information in a form that personally identifies you. Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may 8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain rights under this License will terminate automatically without
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may partial, of the Software.
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your 9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge
upgrade eligibility. and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND

SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS 10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN
"SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11) OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN
HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY,
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY
SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF FITNESS DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE PROVISION OF
OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH
DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR 11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including, without
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct or general
APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE damages in contract or anything else), the entire liability of
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your exclusive
remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of the actual
241
damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the Software up to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If
the amount actually paid by you for the Software or US$5.00. The any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,
foregoing limitations, exclusions and disclaimers (including unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full
Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the maximum extent force and effect.
permitted by applicable law, even if any remedy fails its essential Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
purpose.
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items" superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software and reuse the data by means of special software.
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other
end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly Center for details.
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service
at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and may apply.
binding upon the parties.
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written
communications, proposals and representations with respect to

Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:
1301 East Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,
dial the numbers listed in brackets.
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights
reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change
without notice.
243
Index
Numerics AllShare Memo 41

2G (EDGE) Network 187 Configuring Settings 134 memo 147
2G Network Playing onto Another Device 135 ,
Messaging 41 148
Using 187 Receiving Media 135 TeleNav GPS 43 156 ,
3G Network 187 Transmitting Media 135 Using the Camcorder 123
Using 187 Amazon MP3 136 Using the Camera 116
4G 174 Answering a call 54 Voice Search 44 159,
4G Network 187 Answering Call 188 ,
YouTube 44 160
Using 187 Application Cache and Data Applications and Development 133
A clearing 146 Ask On Connection 51
Accessibility 213 Application Menus Auto Redial 189
Accessing Navigating through 36 Auto Reject 188
Recently-used applications 37 Application Shortcuts Auto-Reply 106
Voice mail 18 Rearranging 46 Auto-sync
Accounts and syncronization 133 Applications 37 Enabling 203
Add 2 sec Pause 56 Android Market 41 144 , B
Adjusting ,
Browser 44 160 Back Up
Call Volume 61 ,
Calculator 39 137 My Data 205
Adobe PDF 156 Calendar 39 Backup and Restore 205
Alarm ,
Camera 39 139 Battery
setting an 178 ,
Email 39 140 Charging 11
Google Mail 40 140 , Extending Life 13
Google Maps 41 142 , Installing 10
244
Low Battery Indicator 12 Sending Contact Information 169 Manually Sync Events 138
Removal 10 Sending Contacts Via 169 Settings 177
Saving Power 14 Set Visibility 168 Call Barring 189
wall charger 11 ,
Settings 167 183 Call Forwarding 189
Battery Cover status indicators 167 Call Functions 53
,
Removal 7 78 Switching to Headset During Call 62 Answering 54
Replace 8 Turning on and off 167 Ending a 53
Battery Life Bluetooth Settings 183 Ending a Call 53
Extending 13 Browser Making a Multi-Party Call 63
Battery Use & Safety 222 adding bookmarks 164 Pause Dialing 56
Bing deleting bookmarks 164 Redialing the last number 57
Set Search Engine 166 emptying cookies 164 Wait dialing 56
,
Block List 67 106 Entering a URL 162 Call Logs 65
Bluetooth Navigation 162 Accessing 65
About 166 Options 162 Accessing from Notifications 66
Activating Device Name 183 Search Engine 166 Altering Numbers 67
Activating Visibility 183 Settings 165 Erasing 68
Change Name 167 Bubble Call Settings 188
Deleting a Paired Device 169 Options 104 General 188
Disable 167 C Voice Calls 189
Disconnecting a Paired Device 169 Calculator Call Volume
,
Enable 139 167 137 Adjusting 61
Paring Devices 168 Scientific Functions 137 ,
Call Waiting 64 189
Scan for Devices 168 Calendar 177 Calling
Scanning for Devices 183 Creating an Event 177 Using Wi-Fi 58
245
Calls Contact Entry Sending All 91
Making a 53 Options 89 Setting Default Location 88
Multi-party 63 Contact Image Settings 97
Muting 62 Set as 122 Contacts List 53
Camcorder 123 Contact Information , ,
Context Menu 86 88 89
Camcorder Options 124 Joining 89 Context Menus
Options 119 Contact List Navigation 37
Settings 120 Options 87 Using 37
Camera 116 Contact Menu Cookies
Camera Options 117 Options 88 Emptying 164
Options 117 Contacts Copying Contact 92
Taking Pictures 116 Adding a Number to Existing 87 Corporate Email
Care and Maintenance 227 Adding Your Facebook Friends 95 Account Syncronization 204
Charging battery 11 Additional Options 96 Add Account 204
Children and Cell Phones 218 Blocking/Unblocking 103 Creating a Playlist 128
Clearing Default Storage Location 97 Creating and Sending
Application Cache and Data 146 Deleting 87 Messages 100
Connections Display Options 94 Customizing
Accessing the Internet 161 Displaying Contacts by Name 94 Home screens 45
Contact Export List to microSD 171 D
Copying to microSD Card 93 Filtering 94 Data Roaming 186
Copying to SIM Card 92 First Name First 94 Deleting
Creating a New 83 Groups 97 Message 104
New From Keypad 84 Last Name First 94 Multiple Messages 104
Sending 91 Deleting a contact 87
246
Device Keyboard Opening 109 FCC Notice and Cautions 234
Settings 211 Opening Internet Email 109 Fixed Dialing Numbers 189
Dialing Refreshing Messages 109 Folder
With a SIM 15 Sending 96 Creating and Managing 48
Without a SIM 15 Emergency Calls 227 Deleting 49
Display Emoticons 80 Renaming 48
Icons 24 Ending a call 53 Font
Settings 24 Entering Text 69 Style 194
Status Bar 24 Using SWYPE 70 Font Size
Display / Touch-Screen 225 Erasing files from Caption 160
Displaying Memory card 52 G
Your Phone Number 53 Exchange Email 110 Gallery
Do cell phones pose a health hazard? Account Setup 111 Folder Options 121
215 Composing 112 Image Options 121
Downloading Configuring Settings 113 Opening 126
New Application 145 Deleting Message 112 GeoTagging
Drive Smart 191 Opening 112 Insert 101
DriveSmart Refreshing Messages 112 Get Friends 94
Handsfree 139 Exposure to RF Signals 215 Getting Started 6
E F Battery 10
Email 108 Facebook Battery Cover 7
Composing 109 Qik 158 Locking/Unlocking the Phone 15
Configuring Settings 110 ,
Factory Data Reset 52 205 microSD card 9
Creating an Account 108 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) SIM Card 8
Internet Email 108 Regulations for Wireless Devices 232 Switching Phone On/Off 15
247
Voice Mail 17 Editing 98 Home screens
,
Gmail 114 140 Removing an Entry 98 Customizing 45
Composing 114 Group Settings HSPA+ 174
Opening 114 Editing a Caller Group 98 I
Refreshing 114 Group Texting 141 Icons
Signing In 114 GSM 186 Description 24
Viewing a Message 115 H indicator 24
Google HAC Mode 191 Status 24
Account Management Settings 204 Handsfree 139 Images
Account Syncronization 203 HD Camcorder Assigning as a Contact icon 122
Add Account 203 Accessing the Video Folder 124 Assigning as Wallpaper 123
Adding a Sync Account 203 Shooting Video 123 Transferring 171
Create New Account 16 Health and Safety Information 215 Verifying 171
Retrieving Password 17 Highlight 141 Importing and Exporting
Set Search Engine 166 Settings 141 To SIM card 97
Signing into Your Account 17 History tab 99 in call
Google Maps Hold options 61
Enabling a Location Source 143 Placing a Call on Hold 61 in call options 62
Opening a Map 143 Home 30 Incoming Call Volume
,
Google Talk 42 155 Home Key 28 Setting 192
GPS & AGPS 225 Home Screen Indicator icons 24
Group Overview 30 indicator icons 24
Adding an Member to an Existing Home Screen Wallpaper 194 International Calls 56
Group 97 Set as 122 Making 56
Creating a New Caller Group 97 Setting 120
248
Internet 161 Managing Applications 199 Merge 63
Search 162 Clearing Application Cache 199 Message
Internet Email 108 Uninstalling Third-party Applications Blocking 103
J 200 Read 102
Joining Market 144 Reply 103
Contact Information 89 Troubleshooting a Connection 145 threads 103
Jump Key 28 Marking a Contact Message Options 101
Settings 202 As Default 91 Message Search 104
K Media Hub 129 Message Thread
Kies Mini 170 Creating a New Account 130 Options 103
Before Using 171 Using 130 Message threads 103
Media hub 129 Messages
L
LED
Media Room 126 147, Creating and Sending 100
Playing Music 126 Icons on Status Bar 100
Notifications 207
Playing Videos 126 Viewing New 102
Lock Screen 15
Media Volume Messaging
Assigning a Shortcut 202
Setting 192 Auto-Reply Settings 106
Viewing Missed Calls 68
Memo Block List 106
Lock Screen Wallpaper 194
Options 147 Creating and Sending Text
Low battery indicator 12
Memory card Messages 100
M Erasing files from the 52 Deleting a message 104
Making Menu Navigation Google Mail 114
International Calls 56 Selecting with Fingers 35 Notifications 206
Making a call 53 Using the Optical Joystick 35 Options 101
Settings 105
249
Signing into Google Mail 114 Mounting the SD card 51 Network Mode 186
Types of Messages 100 Multi-Party Call 63 2G Network 187
microSD Card Dropping One Participant 64 3G Network 187
Insertion 9 Private Conversation 63 New Applications
Removal 10 Multi-party call Downloading 145
,
Microsoft Exchange 83 108 Setting up 63 Notification bar 27
Mini Diary Multi-party calls 63 using the 27
Deleting an Entry 148 Music Player Notification LED
Settings 148 Adding Music 128 Assigning Color 207
Missed Call Creating a Playlist 128 Notification Pop-up 206
Viewing from Lock Screen 68 Editing a Playlist 128 Activate 206
,
Mobile AP 174 184 Removing Music 128 Deactivate 206
Activating 175 My Profile 96 Messaging Notification 206
Connecting 175 My Social Network Status 194 Notification Volume
Securing 176 N Setting 192
Mobile Networks 186 Namecard O
Access Point Names 186 Send Via 91 On/off Switch 15
Data Roaming 186 Sending 91 Operating Environment 230
Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 186 Sending All 91 Organizer
Mobile Web 161 Navigating Calculator 137
Entering Text in the Mobile Web Application Menus 36 World Clock 179
Browser 162 Sub-Menus 36 Other Important Safety Information 234
Navigating with the Mobile Web 162 Through Screens 33 Outlook 108
Using Bookmarks 163 Network Connection Synchronizing 204
Adding a new 173
250
Overview Prefix Dialing 55 Reducing Exposure
Home Screen 30 Adding Prefix 55 Hands-Free Kits and Other
P Deleting 55 Accessories 218
Pause Dialing 56 Primary Shortcuts 32 Reject Call
People Adding and Removing 46 With Message 189
Qik 158 Private Conversation 63 Reject List 67
Phone Q Reset 205
Icons 24 Qik 158 Responsible Listening 228
Switching On/Off 15 Recording Video 159 Restore 205
Phone Number Settings 158 Restricting Children's Access to Your
Finding 53 Quick Phrase 101 Mobile device 233
Phone Options 192 QWERTY Ringtone
Phone Ringtone 193 ,
Keyboard 12 69 Phone 193
Set as 127 Qwerty Keyboard S
Photos Settings 211 Samsung Keypad 74
Options 120 R ABC Mode 75
Setting As 120 Rearranging Changing the Input Type 75
Sharing 120 Application Shortcuts 46 Enabling 74
Pico TTS 212 Screens 46 Entering Symbols 76
Portable Hotspot Recent Applications Key 28 Settings 210
see Mobile AP 174 Recently-used Applications SYM Mode 76
Power Control 14 Accessing 37 XT9 Advanced Settings 210
Predictive Text Redialing the last number 57
Using XT9 77
251
Samsung Mobile Products and Setting up Slacker Radio 127
Recycling 223 Voicemail 17 Smart Practices While Driving 221
Save a Number Settings 181 SNS 95
From Keypad 84 Browser 165 Social Network Contacts
Screen Contact list 97 Resync 95
Home 30 Display 24 Song
Navigation 33 Enabling Wireless Network Set as 127
Screen Lock 196 Locations 195 Speakerphone
Changing 196 Messaging 105 Turning On and Off 62
Screen Rotation Mini Diary 148 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) 219
Auto-Rotate 194 Setup Wizard 154 Speed Dial
Screen Timeout 194 Shortcuts Changing an Entry 58
Screens Adding from Application Screen 47 Making a Call 58
Adding and Deleting 45 Adding from Home Screen 47 Removing an Entry 58
Customizing 45 Deleting from a Screen 47 Setting up Entries 57
Rearranging 46 Managing 46 Split 64
SD card Primary 32 Standard Limited Warranty 236
Mounting the 51 SIM Card Status Bar 24
Unmounting 51 Changing Exisitng PIN 197 Sticky Messages
Search Engine 166 Insertion 8 Clear 102
Secret Message 102 Lock 197 View 102
Select Locale 208 Removal 9 Sub-Menus
Send Namecard Via 91 SIM Card Lock Navigation 36
Sending a Namecard 91 Setting Up 197 Switching to Bluetooth Headset 62
Setting an alarm 178
252
SWYPE Text Input Method Front View 21
123ABC Mode 73 Selecting 69 Understanding your Phone
Entering Text Using 70 Text-to-speech Back View 23
Example 73 Configuration 212 Display 24
Swype Theme Home 30
,
Advanced Settings 70 209 Settings 202 Uninstalling
Configuring Settings 70 Theme Settings 202 Third-Party Applications 146
Entering Text 73 Themes 154 Universal Composer
Help 209 Third-Party Applications 200 Creating and Sending Messages
Settings 209 Uninstalling 146 100
Tutorial 209 Time Management Send All Contacts 92
Swype Keyboard Calendar 177 Settings 105
Using 70 T-Mobile Contacts Backup 83 Unmounting
System Volume T-Mobile Mall 154 SD card 51
Setting 192 Tools Updates tab 99
T Camera 116 USB
Talkback 213 Transferring Music Files 129 Settings 51
Tehering TTY Mode 191 USB Connection
Help 184 ,
Tutorials 43 157 As Mass Storage Device 172
Tethering 184 Twitter Turn Off 51
Activating 184 Qik 158 USB Debugging 201
Active Icon 184 U USB Settings
Disconnecting 184 UL Certified Travel Charger 224 As Mass Storage Device 172
Text Input Understanding Your Phone 20 Mass Storage Device 172
Methods 69 Features 20 Windows Meida Player 171
253
USB Tethering 184 Setting Up 17 My Account 41
Drivers 170 Voicemail 191 ,
Settings 42 154
Use GPS Satellites 195 Volume Settings Stopwatch 180
Use Packet Data 186 Adjusting 192 Wi-Fi 181
Use Sensor Aiding 195 VPN About 172
Use Wireless Networks 195 Adding 185 ,
Activating 59 172 181 ,
Using Favorites Settings 184 Advanced Settings 174
Adding Favorites 164 W Calling 58
Deleting a Favorite 164 Wait 57 Connecting to 173
Editing Favorites 164 Wait dialing 56 Deactivating 174
V Wallpapers Manually Adding Wi-Fi 182
Vibrate 192 Changing 49 Manually Scan for Network 174
Vibration Managing 49 Network Notifications 182
Intensity 193 Warranty Information 236 Settings 181
Setup 192 WCDMA 186 Status Icons 174
Video Chat 158 Web 161 Windows Media Player
Settings 158 Frequent 165 Synchronizing with 171
Video Player 120 History 165 World Clock
Videos Web Applications DST Settings 179
Options 120 Enable Downloading 170 WPA2 PSK 176
Voice Actions 30 Widgets Y
Voice Input Recognition 212 Adding and Removing 47 Yahoo! 166
Voice mail Composer 41 YouTube
Accessing 18 Google Talk 42 High Qulaity 132
Accessing from Another Phone 18 Moving to a Different Screen 48 Qik 158
254

Portable Quad-Band Mobile Phone

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Portable Quad-Band Mobile Phone

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Portable Quad-Band Mobile Phone

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P O R T A B L E Q U A D - B A N D

Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC

Internet Address: http://www.samsung.com

Section 1: Getting Started ..............................................6 Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

This section explains how to get started with your phone by

Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure

SIM Card Overview

The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as

Installing and Removing the SIM card

Installing the microSD Memory Card

Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.

Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.

Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the

Installing the Battery

Low Battery Indicator

Task Manger Overview

Understanding Your Phone 20

9. Notification LED visually blinks to display notification of

Understanding Your Phone 22

Understanding Your Phone 24

Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward.

Understanding Your Phone 26

For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see

Understanding Your Phone 30

Understanding Your Phone 32

Spread (Zoom In)

• Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to

Understanding Your Phone 34

Understanding Your Phone 36

2. A pop-up displays the

Understanding Your Phone 38

Understanding Your Phone 40

Understanding Your Phone 42

Understanding Your Phone 44

Understanding Your Phone 46

Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery

To change the current wallpaper:

This section describes features and functionality associated with

Call Functions and Contacts List 54

Pause Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing

Call Functions and Contacts List 56

Call Functions and Contacts List 58

Call Functions and Contacts List 60

To switch between the two calls: Switching to Bluetooth Headset

Call Functions and Contacts List 62

Call Functions and Contacts List 64

Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.

Indicates any received calls that were answered.

Indicates a missed call.

To clear all entries from the list: To view a missed call

Call Functions and Contacts List 68

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes to

in this mode, the text input type shows SYM .

4. Tap an available option. Contact Overview Screen

2. Select an exchange email account. Deleting an Exchange Email Message

Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows

6 6. Quick view: displays the video for quick viewing.

Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,

Adding Music to a Playlist Editing a Playlist